Instrukcja obslugi HIKVISION DS-72xxHUHI

Digital Video Recorder
User Manual
UD03982B
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
User Manual
COPYRIGHT © 2017 Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd.
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Any and all information, including, among others, wordings, pictures, graphs are the properties of
Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd. or its subsidiaries (hereinafter referred to be
“Hikvision”). This user manual (hereinafter referred to be “the Manual”) cannot be reproduced,
changed, translated, or distributed, partially or wholly, by any means, without the prior written
permission of Hikvision. Unless otherwise stipulated, Hikvision does not make any warranties,
guarantees or representations, express or implied, regarding to the Manual.
About this Manual
This Manual is applicable to Turbo HD Digital Video Recorder (DVR).
The Manual includes instructions for using and managing the product. Pictures, charts, images and
all other information hereinafter are for description and explanation only. The information
contained in the Manual is subject to change, without notice, due to firmware updates or other
reasons. Please find the latest version in the company website
(http://overseas.hikvision.com/en/).
Please use this user manual under the guidance of professionals.
Trademarks Acknowledgement
and other Hikvision’s trademarks and logos are the properties of Hikvision in various
jurisdictions. Other trademarks and logos mentioned below are the properties of their respective
owners.
Legal Disclaimer
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE PRODUCT DESCRIBED, WITH ITS
HARDWARE, SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE, IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND ERRORS,
AND HIKVISION MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY. IN NO EVENT WILL HIKVISION, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS,
EMPLOYEES, OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
INDIRECT DAMAGES, INCLUDING, AMONG OTHERS, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF DATA OR DOCUMENTATION, IN CONNECTION WITH THE
USE OF THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF HIKVISION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
REGARDING TO THE PRODUCT WITH INTERNET ACCESS, THE USE OF PRODUCT SHALL BE WHOLLY
AT YOUR OWN RISKS. HIKVISION SHALL NOT TAKE ANY RESPONSIBILITES FOR ABNORMAL
OPERATION, PRIVACY LEAKAGE OR OTHER DAMAGES RESULTING FROM CYBER ATTACK, HACKER
ATTACK, VIRUS INSPECTION, OR OTHER INTERNET SECURITY RISKS; HOWEVER, HIKVISION WILL
PROVIDE TIMELY TECHNICAL SUPPORT IF REQUIRED.
SURVEILLANCE LAWS VARY BY JURISDICTION. PLEASE CHECK ALL RELEVANT LAWS IN YOUR
JURISDICTION BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT IN ORDER TO ENSURE THAT YOUR USE CONFORMS
THE APPLICABLE LAW. HIKVISION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN THE EVENT THAT THIS PRODUCT IS
USED WITH ILLEGITIMATE PURPOSES.
IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICTS BETWEEN THIS MANUAL AND THE APPLICABLE LAW, THE LATER
PREVAILS.
1
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Regulatory Information
FCC Information
Please take attention that changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC compliance: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
FCC Conditions
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
EU Conformity Statement
This product and - if applicable - the supplied accessories too are marked with "CE" and
comply therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU, the LVD Directive 2014/35/EU, the RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU.
2012/19/EU (WEEE directive): Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as
unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper recycling, return this
product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment, or
dispose of it at designated collection points. For more information see: www.recyclethis.info
2006/66/EC (battery directive): This product contains a battery that cannot be disposed of
as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. See the product documentation for
specific battery information. The battery is marked with this symbol, which may include
lettering to indicate cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), or mercury (Hg). For proper recycling, return the
battery to your supplier or to a designated collection point. For more information see:
www.recyclethis.info
Industry Canada ICES-003 Compliance
This device meets the CAN ICES-3 (A)/NMB-3(A) standards requirements.
2
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Applicable Models
This manual is applicable to the models listed in the following table.
Series
Model
DS-7104HGHI-F1/N
DS-7100HGHI-F1/N
DS-7108HGHI-F1/N
DS-7116HGHI-F1/N
DS-7204HGHI-F1/N
DS-7200HGHI-F1/N
DS-7208HGHI-F1/N
DS-7216HGHI-F1/N
DS-7104HGHI-E1
DS-7100HGHI-E1
DS-7108HGHI-E1
DS-7116HGHI-E1
DS-7204HGHI-E1
DS-7200HGHI-E1
DS-7208HGHI-E1
DS-7216HGHI-E1
DS-7200HGHI-E2
DS-7208HGHI-E2
DS-7216HGHI-E2
DS-7104HGHI-F1
DS-7100HGHI-F1
DS-7108HGHI-F1
DS-7116HGHI-F1
DS-7204HGHI-F1
DS-7200HGHI-F1
DS-7208HGHI-F1
DS-7216HGHI-F1
DS-7200HGHI-F2
DS-7200HQHI-F1/N
DS-7208HGHI-F2
DS-7216HGHI-F2
DS-7204HQHI-F1/N
DS-7208HQHI-F1/N
3
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-7216HQHI-F1/N
DS-7200HQHI-F2/N
DS-7208HQHI-F2/N
DS-7216HQHI-F2/N
DS-7104HQHI-F1/N
DS-7100HQHI-F1/N
DS-7108HQHI-F1/N
DS-7116HQHI-F1/N
DS-7304HQHI-F4/N
DS-7300HQHI-F4/N
DS-7308HQHI-F4/N
DS-7316HQHI-F4/N
DS-8104HQHI-F8/N
DS-8100HQHI-F8/N
DS-8108HQHI-F8/N
DS-8116HQHI-F8/N
DS-7200HUHI-F1/N
DS-7204HUHI-F1/N
DS-7208HUHI-F1/N
DS-7204HUHI-F2/N
DS-7200HUHI-F2/N
DS-7208HUHI-F2/N
DS-7216HUHI-F2/N
DS-7200HUHI-F1/S
DS-7204HUHI-F1/S
DS-7208HUHI-F1/S
DS-7204HUHI-F2/S
DS-7200HUHI-F2/S
DS-7208HUHI-F2/S
DS-7216HUHI-F2/S
DS-7604HUHI-F1/N
DS-7600HUHI-F/N
DS-7608HUHI-F2/N
DS-7616HUHI-F2/N
DS-7304HUHI-F4/N
DS-7300HUHI-F4/N
DS-7308HUHI-F4/N
DS-7316HUHI-F4/N
4
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-8104HUHI-F8/N
DS-8100HUHI-F8/N
DS-8108HUHI-F8/N
DS-8116HUHI-F8/N
DS-9004HUHI-F8/N
DS-9000HUHI-F8/N
DS-9008HUHI-F8/N
DS-9016HUHI-F8/N
DS-9000HUHI-F16/N
DS-9008HUHI-F16/N
DS-9016HUHI-F16/N
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Provides additional information to emphasize or
supplement important points of the main text.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which
if not avoided, could result in equipment
damage, data loss, performance degradation, or
unexpected results.
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which
if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
5
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Safety Instructions

Proper configuration of all passwords and other security settings is the responsibility of the
installer and/or end-user.

In the use of the product, you must be in strict compliance with the electrical safety
regulations of the nation and region. Please refer to technical specifications for detailed
information.

Input voltage should meet both the SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) and the Limited Power
Source with 100 to 240 VAC or 12 VDC according to the IEC60950-1 standard. Please refer to
technical specifications for detailed information.

Do not connect several devices to one power adapter as adapter overload may cause
over-heating or a fire hazard.

Please make sure that the plug is firmly connected to the power socket.

If smoke, odor or noise rise from the device, turn off the power at once and unplug the power
cable, and then please contact the service center.
Preventive and Cautionary Tips
Before connecting and operating your device, please be advised of the following tips:

Ensure unit is installed in a well-ventilated, dust-free environment.

Unit is designed for indoor use only.

Keep all liquids away from the device.

Ensure environmental conditions meet factory specifications.

Ensure unit is properly secured to a rack or shelf. Major shocks or jolts to the unit as a result of
dropping it may cause damage to the sensitive electronics within the unit.

Use the device in conjunction with an UPS if possible.

Power down the unit before connecting and disconnecting accessories and peripherals.

A factory recommended HDD should be used for this device.

Improper use or replacement of the battery may result in hazard of explosion. Replace with
the same or equivalent type only. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions
provided by the battery manufacturer.

Ensure to use the attached power adaptor only and not to change the adaptor randomly.
6
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
1.1 Product Key Features
General

Connectable to Turbo HD and analog cameras;

Supports UTC protocol for connecting camera over coax;

Connectable to AHD cameras (-F series DVR);

Connectable to HDCVI cameras;

Connectable to IP cameras;
The IP camera connection is not supported by DS-7100 series DVR.

The analog signal inputs including Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, and CVBS can be automatically
recognized without configuration;

Each channel supports dual-stream. And sub-stream supports up to WD1 resolution;

The main stream of HGHI models support up to 720p resolution;

The main stream of HQHI series support up to 3 MP resolution for the first channel of DVR
with 4-ch video inputs, the first 2 channels of DVR with 8-ch video inputs and the first 4
channels of DVR with 16-ch video inputs;

For HQHI and DS-7200HUHI series DVR, if the 3 MP camera is connected to the channel which
supports up to 1080p signal input, it will switch to 1080p signal input. When the 3 MP signal is
switched to 1080p signal, the PAL will be switched to 1080p/25Hz, and the NTSC will be
switched to 1080p/30Hz;

The main stream of DS-7200/7300/7600/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series supports up to 3 MP
resolution of all the channels;

The main stream of DS-7200HUHI-F/S series supports up to 5 MP resolution of all the
channels;

For DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR, 5 MP long distance transmission can be enabled for the
analog cameras;

For HGHI-F series DVR, 1080p lite mode is applicable to all the channels;

Independent configuration for each channel, including resolution, frame rate, bit rate, image
quality, etc.;

Encoding for both video stream and video & audio stream; audio and video synchronization
during composite stream encoding;

Supports enabling H.265+ (for DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series)/H.264+ to ensure high
video quality with lowered bit rate;

One-key enable or disable H.264+ for -F series DVR;
7
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Defog level, night to day sensitivity, day to night sensitivity, and IR light brightness configurable
for the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters;

4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras;

Watermark technology.
Local Monitoring

HDMI output at up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution for DS-7116HQHI-F1/N, DS-7216HQHI-F1/N,
DS-7216HQHI-F2/N, DS-7208HUHI-F1/N, DS-7208HUHI-F2/N, DS-7216HUHI-F2/N,
DS-7608HUHI-F2/N, DS-7616HUHI-F2/N, DS-7208HUHI-F1/S, DS-7208HUHI-F2/S,
DS-7216HUHI-F2/S, DS-7300HQHI-F4/N and DS-8100HQHI-F8/N;

For DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR, the HDMI and VGA
interfaces can be configured to be simultaneous or independent. Up to 1920 × 1080/60 Hz
resolution is supported for VGA output and up to 4K (3840 × 2160)/30 Hz resolution is
supported for HDMI output.

For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, there are two HDMI interfaces of which the HDMI1
and VGA interfaces share simultaneous output. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1920 × 1080
resolution is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160) resolution is supported;

1/4/6/8/9/16/25/36 screen live view is supported, and the display sequence of screens is
adjustable;
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, if the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25,
up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.

Live view screen can be switched in group and manual switch and automatic cycle live view are
also provided, the interval of automatic cycle can be adjusted;

For –F series DVR, CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output.

Quick setting menu is provided for live view;

The selected live view channel can be shielded;

VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback
for the supported analog and IP cameras;

Motion detection, video-tampering detection, video exception alarm, video loss alarm and
VCA alarm functions;

For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, 1-ch analog camera supports people counting
and heat map functions;

DS-7200/7300/8100/9000HUHI series DVR support VCA (line crossing detection and intrusion
detection) of all channels. DS-7600HUHI-F/N series DVR support 2-ch VCA (line crossing
detection and intrusion detection). HQHI series DVR exluding 7100 series support 2-ch VCA
(line crossing detection and intrusion detection). For the analog channels, the line crossing
detection and intrusion detection conflict with other VCA detection such as sudden scene
8
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
change detection, face detection and vehicle detection and heat map or people counting
functions. You can only enable one function;

DS-7208/7216HUHI-F/N series DVR supports enhanced VCA mode to enable all-channel line
crossing detection and intrusion detection and disable 2K/4K output resolution. After you
enable it, you can also disable it and the line crossing detection and intrusion detection will be
supported by 2-ch only;

For DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR, the enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output
and 4 MP/5 MP signal input;

Privacy mask;

Several PTZ protocols (including Omnicast VMS of Genetec) supported; PTZ preset, patrol and
pattern;

Zooming in/out by clicking the mouse and PTZ tracing by dragging mouse.
HDD Management

Each disk with a maximum of 8 TB storage capacity for DS-9000HUHI-F16/N series DVR and 6
TB for other models;

8 network disks (8 NAS disks, 8 IP SAN disks or n NAS disks + m IP SAN disks (n+m ≤ 8)) can be
connected;

Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed;

Supports cloud storage;
Cloud storage is only applicable to HQHI-F/N and HUHI series DVR.

S.M.A.R.T. and bad sector detection;

HDD sleeping function;

HDD property: redundancy, read-only, read/write (R/W);

HDD group management;

HDD quota management; different capacity can be assigned to different channels.

For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, hot-swappable HDD supporting RAID0, RAID1, RAID5,
RAID 6 and RAID10 storage scheme, and can be enabled and disabled on your demand. And 16
arrays can be configured.
Recording, Capture and Playback
Capture is supported by DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR only.

Holiday recording schedule configuration;

Cycle and non-cycle recording modes;

Normal and event video encoding parameters;
9
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Multiple recording types: manual, continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm
and Event;

Supports POS triggered recording for DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and
DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR;

8 recording time periods with separated recording types;

Supports Channel-Zero encoding;

Main stream and sub-stream configurable for simultaneous recording;

Pre-record and post-record for motion detection triggered recording, and pre-record time for
schedule and manual recording;

Searching record files and captured pictures by events (alarm input/motion detection);

Customization of tags, searching and playing back by tags;

Locking and unlocking of record files;

Local redundant recording and capture;

For -F series DVR, when Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, the information
including the resolution and frame rate will be overlaid on the bottom right corner of the live
view for 5 seconds. When CVBS input is connected, the information such as NTSC or PAL will
be overlaid on the bottom right corner of the live view for 5 seconds.

Searching and playing back record files by camera number, recording type, start time, end time,
etc.;

Smart playback to go through less effective information;

Main stream and sub-stream selectable for local/remote playback;

Zooming in for any area when playback;

Multi-channel reverse playback;

Supports pause, fast forward, slow forward, skip forward, and skip backward when playback,
locating by dragging the mouse on the progress bar;

4/8/16-ch synchronous playback;

Manual capture, continuous capture of video images and playback of captured pictures.
Backup

Exports data by a USB, and SATA device;

Exports video clips when playback;

Management and maintenance of backup devices.
Alarm and Exception

Configurable arming time of alarm input/output;

Alarms for video loss, motion detection, video tampering, abnormal signal, video
input/recording resolution mismatch, illegal login, network disconnected, IP confliction,
record/capture exception, HDD error, and HDD full, etc.;
10
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Alarm triggers full screen monitoring, audio alarm, notifying surveillance center, sending email
and alarm output;

One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input;

PTZ linking for the VCA alarm;

VCA detection alarm is supported;
DS-7100 does not support VCA alarm.

Supports POS triggered alarm;

Supports coaxial alarm;

System will automatically reboot when a problem is detected in an attempt to restore normal
functionality.
Other Local Functions

Manual and automatic video quality diagnostics;

Operable by mouse and remote control;

Three-level user management; admin user can create many operating account and define their
operating permission, which includes the permission to access any channel;

Completeness of operation, alarm, exceptions and log writing and searching;

Manually triggering and clearing alarms;

Importing and exporting of configuration file of devices;

Getting cameras type information automatically;

Unlock pattern for device login for the admin;

Clear-text password available;

GUID file can be exported for password resetting;

Multiple connected analog cameras supporting Turbo HD or AHD signal can be upgraded
simultaneously via DVR.
Network Functions

2 self-adaptive 10M/100M/1000M network interfaces for DS-8100HQHI-F/N and
DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series. For DS-8100HQHI-F/N series, three working modes are
configurable: multi-address, load balance and network fault tolerance. For
DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, only multi-address and network fault tolerance are
configurable. 1 self-adaptive 10M/100M/1000M network interface or 1 self-adaptive
10M/100Mbps network interface provided for other models;

IPv6 is supported;

TCP/IP protocol, PPPoE, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™ and HTTPS are
supported;
11
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Supports access by Hik Cloud P2P;

TCP, UDP and RTP for unicast;

Auto/Manual port mapping by UPnPTM;

Remote search, playback, download, locking and unlocking the record files, and downloading
files broken transfer resume;

Remote parameters setup; remote import/export of device parameters;

Remote viewing of the device status, system logs and alarm status;

Remote keyboard operation;

Remote HDD formatting and program upgrading;

Remote system restart and shutdown;

Supports upgrading via remote FTP server;

RS-485 transparent channel transmission;

Alarm and exception information can be sent to the remote host;

Remotely start/stop recording;

Remotely start/stop alarm output;

Remote PTZ control;

Remote JPEG capture;

Two-way audio and voice broadcasting;

Output bandwidth limit configurable for -F series DVR;

Embedded WEB server;

For -F series DVR, if DHCP is enabled, you can enable DNS DHCP or disable it and edit the
Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server.
Development Scalability

SDK for Windows and Linux system;

Source code of application software for demo;

Development support and training for application system.
12
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Table of Contents
1.1 Product Key Features ......................................................................................................... 7
Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 20
1.1
Front Panel ............................................................................................... 20
1.2
IR Remote Control Operations ................................................................. 37
1.3
USB Mouse Operation ............................................................................. 40
1.4
Input Method Description ....................................................................... 41
1.5
Rear Panel ................................................................................................ 42
Chapter 2 Getting Started .............................................................................................................. 52
2.1
Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR ................................................. 52
2.2
Activating the Device ............................................................................... 53
2.3
Using the Unlock Pattern for Login .......................................................... 55
2.3.1
Configuring the Unlock Pattern ............................................................... 55
2.3.2
Logging in via Unlock Pattern................................................................... 57
2.4
Basic Configuration in Startup Wizard ..................................................... 59
2.5
Login and Logout ..................................................................................... 64
2.5.1
User Login ................................................................................................ 64
2.5.2
User Logout .............................................................................................. 65
2.6
Resetting Your Password .......................................................................... 66
2.7
Adding and Connecting the IP Cameras .................................................. 67
2.6.1
Activating the IP Camera.......................................................................... 67
2.6.2
Adding the Online IP Camera ................................................................... 69
2.6.3
Editing the Connected IP Camera ............................................................ 73
2.8
Viewing Signal Input Status ..................................................................... 74
Chapter 3 Live View ....................................................................................................................... 76
3.1
Introduction of Live View ........................................................................ 76
3.2
Operations in Live View Mode................................................................. 76
3.2.1
Using the Mouse in Live View .................................................................. 78
3.2.2
Switching Main/Aux Output .................................................................... 80
3.2.3
Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode ................................................ 81
3.3
Channel-Zero Encoding ............................................................................ 84
3.4
Adjusting Live View Settings .................................................................... 84
3.5
Manual Video Quality Diagnostics .......................................................... 86
13
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 4 PTZ Controls ................................................................................................................. 88
4.1
Configuring PTZ Settings .......................................................................... 88
4.2
Setting PTZ Presets, Patrols and Patterns ................................................ 90
4.2.1
Customizing Presets ................................................................................. 90
4.2.2
Calling Presets .......................................................................................... 91
4.2.3
Customizing Patrols.................................................................................. 91
4.2.4
Calling Patrols........................................................................................... 92
4.2.5
Customizing Patterns ............................................................................... 93
4.2.6
Calling Patterns ........................................................................................ 94
4.2.7
Customizing Linear Scan Limit ................................................................. 95
4.2.8
Calling Linear Scan ................................................................................... 96
4.2.9
One-Touch Park ........................................................................................ 97
4.3
PTZ Control Panel ..................................................................................... 98
Chapter 5 Recording and Capture Settings ............................................................................... 100
5.1
Configuring Encoding Parameters ......................................................... 100
5.2
Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule ....................................... 105
5.3
Configuring Motion Detection Recording and Capture ......................... 109
5.4
Configuring Alarm Triggered Recording and Capture ............................ 111
5.5
Configuring Event Recording and Capture ............................................. 112
5.6
Configuring Manual Recording and Continous Capture ........................ 114
5.7
Configuring Holiday Recording and Capture.......................................... 115
5.8
Configuring Redundant Recording and Capture .................................... 117
5.9
Configuring HDD Group ......................................................................... 118
5.10
Files Protection ...................................................................................... 119
5.11
One-Key Enabling and Disabling H.264+ for Analog Cameras ............... 121
5.12
Configuring 1080P Lite ........................................................................... 123
Chapter 6 Playback ....................................................................................................................... 127
6.1
Playing Back Record Files .................................................................. 127
6.1.1
Instant Playback ..................................................................................... 127
6.1.2
Playing Back by Normal Search .............................................................. 127
6.1.3
Playing Back by Event Search ................................................................. 130
6.1.4
Playing Back by Tag ................................................................................ 132
6.1.5
Playing Back by Smart Search ................................................................ 135
6.1.6
Playing Back by System Logs .................................................................. 139
6.1.7
Playing Back by Sub-Periods .................................................................. 140
14
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
6.1.8
Playing Back External File ...................................................................... 141
6.1.9
Playing Back Pictures ............................................................................. 142
6.2
Auxiliary Functions of Playback....................................................... 143
6.2.1
Playing Back Frame by Frame ................................................................ 143
6.2.2
Digital Zoom ........................................................................................... 144
6.2.3
Reverse Playback of Multi-Channel ....................................................... 144
Chapter 7 Backup .......................................................................................................................... 146
7.1
Backing up Record Files..................................................................... 146
7.1.1
Backing up by Normal Video/Picture Search ......................................... 146
7.1.2
Backing up by Event Search ................................................................... 148
7.1.3
Backing up Video Clips ........................................................................... 149
7.2
Managing Backup Devices ................................................................ 150
Chapter 8 Alarm Settings ............................................................................................................. 152
8.1
Setting Motion Detection ...................................................................... 152
8.2
Setting Sensor Alarms ............................................................................ 154
8.3
Detecting Video Loss ............................................................................. 156
8.4
Detecting Video Tampering ................................................................... 158
8.5
Setting All-day Video Quality Diagnostics ............................................. 159
8.6
Handling Exceptions............................................................................... 161
8.7
Setting Alarm Response Actions ............................................................ 163
Chapter 9 POS Configuration...................................................................................................... 166
9.1
Configuring POS Settings ....................................................................... 166
9.2
Configuring Overlay Channel ................................................................. 171
9.3
Configuring POS Alarm........................................................................... 172
Chapter 10 VCA Alarm ................................................................................................................ 175
10.1
Face Detection ....................................................................................... 175
10.2
Vehicle Detection ................................................................................... 177
10.3
Line Crossing Detection ......................................................................... 178
10.4
Intrusion Detection ................................................................................ 180
10.5
Region Entrance Detection .................................................................... 182
10.6
Region Exiting Detection ........................................................................ 183
10.7
Loitering Detection ................................................................................ 184
10.8
People Gathering Detection .................................................................. 184
10.9
Fast Moving Detection ........................................................................... 184
15
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
10.10
Parking Detection................................................................................... 185
10.11
Unattended Baggage Detection ............................................................. 185
10.12
Object Removal Detection ..................................................................... 185
10.13
Audio Exception Detection .................................................................... 186
10.14
Defocus Detection.................................................................................. 187
10.15
Sudden Scene Change............................................................................ 188
10.16
PIR Alarm ............................................................................................... 188
Chapter 11 VCA Search ................................................................................................................ 190
11.1
Face Search ............................................................................................ 190
11.2
Behavior Search ..................................................................................... 192
11.3
Plate Search ........................................................................................... 193
11.4
People Counting ..................................................................................... 194
11.5
Heat Map ............................................................................................... 195
Chapter 12 Network Settings ...................................................................................................... 197
12.1
Configuring General Settings............................................................ 197
12.2
Configuring Advanced Settings ....................................................... 198
12.2.1
Configuring PPPoE Settings .................................................................... 198
12.2.2
Configuring Hik Cloud P2P ..................................................................... 199
12.2.3
Configuring DDNS .................................................................................. 200
12.2.4
Configuring NTP Server .......................................................................... 201
12.2.5
Configuring NAT ..................................................................................... 202
12.2.6
Configuring More Settings ..................................................................... 204
12.2.7
Configuring HTTPS Port.......................................................................... 205
12.2.8
Configuring Email ................................................................................... 207
12.2.9
Checking Network Traffic ....................................................................... 209
12.3
Configuring Network Detection ....................................................... 209
12.3.1
Testing Network Delay and Packet Loss ................................................. 210
12.3.2
Exporting Network Packet ..................................................................... 210
12.3.3
Checking Network Status ....................................................................... 211
12.3.4
Checking Network Statistics................................................................... 212
Chapter 13 RAID ........................................................................................................................... 214
13.1
Configuring Array ................................................................................... 214
13.1.1
Enable RAID ........................................................................................... 215
13.1.2
One-touch Configuration ....................................................................... 216
16
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
13.1.3
13.2
Manually Creating Array ........................................................................ 217
Rebuilding Array..................................................................................... 219
13.2.1
Automatically Rebuilding Array ............................................................. 220
13.2.2
Manually Rebuilding Array..................................................................... 220
13.3
Deleting Array ........................................................................................ 221
13.4
Checking and Editing Firmware ............................................................. 222
Chapter 14 HDD Management ................................................................................................... 223
14.1
Initializing HDDs ..................................................................................... 223
14.2
Managing Network HDD ........................................................................ 224
14.3
Managing HDD Group ............................................................................ 227
14.3.1
Setting HDD Groups ............................................................................... 227
14.3.2
Setting HDD Property............................................................................. 228
14.4
Configuring Quota Mode ....................................................................... 229
14.5
Configuring Cloud Storage ..................................................................... 230
14.6
Configuring Disk Clone ........................................................................... 233
14.7
Checking HDD Status ............................................................................. 235
14.8
Checking S.M.A.R.T Information ............................................................ 235
14.9
Detecting Bad Sector ............................................................................. 236
14.10
Configuring HDD Error Alarms ............................................................... 237
Chapter 15 Camera Settings ........................................................................................................ 239
15.1
Configuring OSD Settings ................................................................. 239
15.2
Configuring Privacy Mask ................................................................ 240
15.3
Configuring Video Parameters ......................................................... 241
15.3.1
Configuring Image Settings .................................................................... 241
15.3.2
Configuring Camera Parameters Settings .............................................. 243
Chapter 16 DVR Management and Maintenance ..................................................................... 245
16.1
Viewing System Information ............................................................ 245
16.2
Searching Log Files ............................................................................. 245
16.3
Importing/Exporting IP Camera Info ............................................. 248
16.4
Importing/Exporting Configuration Files ...................................... 248
16.5
Upgrading System .............................................................................. 249
16.5.1
Upgrading by Local Backup Device ........................................................ 249
16.5.2
Upgrading by FTP ................................................................................... 249
16.6
Upgrading Camera ............................................................................. 250
17
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
16.7
Restoring Default Settings ................................................................. 250
Chapter 17 Others ......................................................................................................................... 252
17.1
Configuring General Settings............................................................ 252
17.2
Configuring RS-232 Serial Port ......................................................... 254
17.3
Configuring DST Settings .................................................................. 254
17.4
Configuring More Settings ................................................................ 255
17.5
Managing User Accounts .................................................................. 258
17.5.1
Adding a User ......................................................................................... 258
17.5.2
Deleting a User....................................................................................... 261
17.5.3
Editing a User ......................................................................................... 262
Chapter 18 Appendix ................................................................................................................... 265
18.1
Specifications ......................................................................................... 265
18.1.1
DS-7100HGHI-E1 .................................................................................... 265
18.1.2
DS-7200HGHI-E1 .................................................................................... 268
18.1.3
DS-7200HGHI-E2 .................................................................................... 270
18.1.4
DS-7100HGHI-F1 .................................................................................... 272
18.1.5
DS-7200HGHI-F1 .................................................................................... 274
18.1.6
DS-7200HGHI-F2 .................................................................................... 276
18.1.7
DS-7100HQHI-F1/N ................................................................................ 278
18.1.8
DS-7200HQHI-F1/N ................................................................................ 281
18.1.9
DS-7200HQHI-F2/N ................................................................................ 284
18.1.10
DS-7100HGHI-F1/N ................................................................................ 287
18.1.11
DS-7200HGHI-F1/N................................................................................. 289
18.1.12
DS-7200HUHI-F1/N................................................................................. 291
18.1.13
DS-7200HUHI-F2/N................................................................................. 294
18.1.14
DS-7200HUHI-F1/S ................................................................................. 297
18.1.15
DS-7200HUHI-F2/S ................................................................................. 300
18.1.16
DS-7600HUHI-F/N .................................................................................. 303
18.1.17
DS-7300HUHI-F4/N ................................................................................ 306
18.1.18
DS-8100HUHI-F8/N ................................................................................ 309
18.1.19
DS-9000HUHI-F8/N ................................................................................ 312
18.1.20
DS-9000HUHI-F16/N .............................................................................. 315
18.1.21
DS-7300HQHI-F4/N ................................................................................ 318
18.1.22
DS-8100HQHI-F8/N ................................................................................ 321
18.2
Glossary ................................................................................................. 324
18
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.3
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 325
18.4
Summary of Changes ............................................................................. 328
18.4.1
Version 3.4.90 ........................................................................................ 328
18.4.2
Version 3.4.80 ........................................................................................ 328
18.4.3
Version 3.4.75 ........................................................................................ 329
18.4.4
Version 3.4.70 ........................................................................................ 330
18.4.5
Version 3.4.65 ........................................................................................ 331
18.4.6
Version 3.4.60 ........................................................................................ 332
18.4.7
Version 3.4.51 ........................................................................................ 332
18.4.8
Version 3.4.50 ........................................................................................ 332
18.4.9
Version 3.4.4 .......................................................................................... 333
18.4.10
Version 3.4.3 .......................................................................................... 333
18.4.11
Version 3.4.2 .......................................................................................... 334
18.5
List of Compatible Hikvision IP Cameras................................................ 335
18.6
List of Compatible Third-Party IP Cameras ............................................ 336
19
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Front Panel
Front Panel 1:
Figure 1-1 Front Panel of DS-7100
Front Panel 2:
Figure 1-2 Front Panel of DS-7200HGHI
Table 1-1 Descriptionon of Front Panel
No. Icon
Description
1
Turns red when DVR is powered up.
2
Turns red when data is being read from or written to
HDD.
3
Flickers blue when network connection is functioning
properly.
Front Panel 3:
20
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 1-3 Front Panel of DS-7200HQHI-F/N
Table 1-2 Description of Front Panel
No. Name
Function Description
POWER
Turns green when the power switch on the rear panel
is turned on.
STATUS
Flickers red when data is being read from or written to
HDD.
Tx/Rx
Flickers green when network connection is functioning
properly.
2
IR Receiver
Receiver for IR remote
3
USB Interfaces
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional devices
such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk Drive (HDD).
1
Front Panel 4:
Figure 1-4 Front Panel of DS-7200HUHI and DS-7600HUHI-F/N
21
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Table 1-3 Description of Front Panel
No.
1
Name
Function Description
POWER
Turns green when the device is running.
STATUS
Flickers red when data is being read from or
written to HDD, and turns green when the SHIFT
function is realized.
Tx/Rx
Flickers green when network connection is
functioning properly.
SHIFT
1/MENU
Switches between the numeric or letter input
and functions of the composite keys.
Enters numeral “1”;
Accesses the main menu interface.
Enters numeral “2”;
Enters letters “ABC”;
2/ABC/F1
2
Uses the F1 button to select all items in a list
field;
Turns on/off PTZ light in PTZ Control mode, and
use it to zoom out the image;
Composite
Keys
Switches between main and spot video output
in live view or playback mode.
Enters numeral “3”;
Enters letters “DEF”;
3/DEF/F2
Uses the F2 button to change the tab pages;
Zooms in the image in PTZ control mode.
Enters numeral “4”;
4/GHI/ESC
Enters letters “GHI”;
22
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No.
Name
Function Description
Exits and back to the previous menu.
Enters numeral “5”;
Enters letters “JKL”;
5/JKL/EDIT
Deletes characters before cursor;
Checks the checkbox and select the ON/OFF
switch;
Starts/stops record clipping in playback.
Enters numeral “6”;
6/MNO/PLAY
Enters letters “MNO”;
Accesses to playback interface in Playback
mode.
Enters numeral “7”;
7/PQRS/REC
Enters letters “PQRS”;
Accesses to manual record interface;
Manually enables/disables record.
Enters numeral “8”;
8/TUV/PTZ
Enters letters “TUV”;
Accesses PTZ control interface.
Enters numeral “9”;
9/WXYZ/PREV Enters letters “WXYZ”;
Multi-channel display in live view.
23
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No.
Name
Function Description
Enters numeral “0”;
0/A
Shifts the input methods in the editing text field.
(Upper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or
numeric input).
Navigates between different fields and items in
menus.
Uses the Up and Down buttons to speed up and
slow down the playing of video files in Playback
mode.
DIRECTION
The Left and Right button will select the next
and previous record files.
Cycles through channels in Live View mode.
Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in
PTZ control mode.
3
Confirms selection in any of the menu modes.
Checks the checkbox.
ENTER
Plays or pauses the playing of video files in
Playback mode.
Advances the video by a single frame in
single-frame Playback mode.
Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode.
4
USB Interface
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional
devices such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk
Drive (HDD).
5
IR Receiver
Receiver for IR remote control.
Front Panel 5:
24
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 1-5 Front Panel of DS-7300HQHI-F/N and DS-7300HUHI-F/N
Table 1-4 Description of Front Panel
No. Name
Function Description
POWER
Turns green when DVR is powered up.
READY
Turns green, indicating that the DVR is functioning
properly.
Turns green when device is controlled by an IR
remote.
STATUS
Turns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple
when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same
time.
1
2
ALARM
Turns red when a sensor alarm is detected.
HDD
Flickers in red when data is being read from or
written to HDD.
Tx/Rx
Flickers in green when network connection is
functioning properly.
DVD-R/W
Slot for DVD-R/W.
SHIFT
3
Composite
Keys
1/MENU
2/ABC/F1
Switches between the numeric or letter input and
functions of the composite keys. (Input letter or
numbers when the light is out; Realize functions
when the light is red.)
Enters numeral “1”;
Accesses the main menu interface.
Enters numeral “2”;
25
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No. Name
Function Description
Enters letters “ABC”;
The F1 button when used in a list field will select all
items in the list;
Turns on/off PTZ light in PTZ Control mode, and use
it to zoom out the image;
Switches between main and spot video output in live
view or playback mode.
Enters numeral “3”;
Enters letters “DEF”;
3/DEF/F2
Uses the F2 button is used to change the tab pages;
Zooms in the image in PTZ control mode.
Enters numeral “4”;
4/GHI/ESC
Enters letters “GHI”;
Exits and back to the previous menu.
Enters numeral “5”;
Enters letters “JKL”;
5/JKL/EDIT
Deletes characters before cursor;
Check the checkbox and select the ON/OFF switch;
Starts/stops record clipping in playback.
Enters numeral “6”;
6/MNO/PLAY
Enters letters “MNO”;
Accesses to playback interface in Playback mode.
26
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No. Name
Function Description
Enters numeral “7”;
7/PQRS/REC
Enters letters “PQRS”;
Accesses to manual record interface;
Manually enables/disables record.
Enters numeral “8”;
8/TUV/PTZ
Enters letters “TUV”;
Accesses PTZ control interface.
Enters numeral “9”;
9/WXYZ/PREV Enters letters “WXYZ”;
Multi-channel display in live view.
Enters numeral “0”;
0/A
Shifts the input methods in the editing text field.
(Upper and lowercase, alphabet, symbols or numeric
input).
Navigates between different fields and items in
menus.
Uses the Up and Down buttons to speed up and slow
down the playing of video files in Playback mode.
DIRECTION
4
The Left and Right button will select the next and
previous record files.
Cycles through channels in Live View mode.
Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ
control mode.
ENTER
Confirms selection in any of the menu modes.
27
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No. Name
Function Description
Checks the checkbox.
Plays or pauses the playing of video files in Playback
mode.
Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame
Playback mode.
Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode.
5
POWER
Power on/off switch.
Moves the active selection up and down in a menu.
Cycles through different channels in live view mode.
6
JOG SHUTTLE Control
Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the
playback mode.
Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ
control mode.
Moves the active selection up and down in a menu.
7
USB Interface
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional
devices such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk Drive
(HDD).
8
IR Receiver
Receiver for IR remote control.
Front Panel 6:
Figure 1-6 Front Panel of DS-8100HQHI-F/N and DS-8100HUHI-F/N
28
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Table 1-5 Description of Front Panel
No.
Name
Function Description
ALARM
Turns red when a sensor alarm is detected.
READY
Turns blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning
properly.
Turns blue when device is controlled by an IR
remote.
STATUS
1
Status
Indicators
Turns red when controlled by a keyboard and
purple when IR remote and keyboard is used at the
same time.
HDD
Flickers in red when data is being read from or
written to HDD.
Tx/Rx
Flickers in blue when network connection is
functioning properly.
Turns blue when the device is in armed status; at
this time, an alarm is enabled when an event is
detected.
GUARD
Turns off when the device is unarmed. The
arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and
holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds
in live view mode.
Switches to the corresponding channel in live view
or PTZ control mode.
Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode.
2
Alphanumeric Buttons
Switches between different channels in playback
mode.
Turns blue when the corresponding channel is
recording; turns red when the channel is in network
transmission status; turns pink when the channel is
recording and transmitting.
29
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No.
Name
Function Description
Navigates between different fields and items in
menus.
Uses the Up and Down buttons to speed up and
slow down the playing of video files in Playback
mode.
DIRECTION
The Left and Right button will select the next and
previous record files.
Cycles through channels in Live View mode.
3
Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ
control mode.
Control
Buttons
Confirms selection in any of the menu modes.
Checks the checkbox.
ENTER
Plays or pauses the playing of video files in Playback
mode.
Advances the video by a single frame in
single-frame Playback mode.
Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode.
Moves the active selection up and down in a menu.
Cycles through different channels in live view
mode.
4
JOG SHUTTLE Control
Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the
playback mode.
Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ
control mode.
5
POWER
Power on/off switch.
30
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No.
Name
Function Description
6
USB Interfaces
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional
devices such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk
Drive (HDD).
Returns to the previous menu.
ESC
Presses for arming/disarming the device in live
view mode.
Enters the Manual Record settings menu.
REC/SHOT
Presses this button followed by a numeric button to
call a PTZ preset in PTZ control settings.
Turns audio on/off in the playback mode.
Enters the playback mode.
PLAY/AUTO
Automatically scans in the PTZ control menu.
ZOOM+
7
Compos
ite Keys
Zooms in the PTZ camera in the PTZ control setting.
Adjusts focus in the PTZ Control menu.
A/FOCUS+
Switches between input methods (upper and lower
case alphabet, symbols and numeric input).
Edits text fields. When editing text fields, it also
deletes the character in front of the cursor.
Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields.
EDIT/IRIS+
Adjusts the iris of the camera in PTZ control mode.
Generates video clips for backup in playback mode.
Enters/exits the folder of USB device and eSATA
HDD.
MAIN/SPOT
Switches between main and spot output.
31
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No.
Name
Function Description
/ZOOM-
Zooms out the image in PTZ control mode.
Selects all items on the list when used in a list field.
F1/LIGHT
Turns on/off PTZ light (if applicable) in PTZ control
mode.
Switches between play and reverse play in playback
mode.
Cycles through tab pages.
F2/AUX
Switches between
playback mode.
channels
in
synchronous
Returns to the Main menu (after successful login).
MENU/WIP
ER
Presses and holds the button for five seconds to
turn off audible key beep.
Starts wiper (if applicable) in PTZ control mode.
Shows/hides the control interface in playback
mode.
PREV/FOCU
S-
Switches between single screen and multi-screen
mode.
Adjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOCUS+
button in PTZ control mode.
Enters the PTZ Control mode.
PTZ/IRIS-
Adjusts the iris of the PTZ camera in PTZ control
mode.
8
IR Receiver
Receiver for IR remote control.
9
DVD-R/W
Slot for DVD-R/W.
Front Panel 7:
32
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 1-7 Front Panel of DS-9000HUHI-F8/N
Front Panel 8:
Figure 1-8 Front Panel of DS-9000HUHI-F16/N
Table 1-6 Description of Front Panel
No. Name
Function Description
ALARM
Turns red when a sensor alarm is detected.
READY
Turns blue, indicating that the DVR is functioning
properly.
Turns blue when device is controlled by an IR remote.
1
STATUS
Turns red when controlled by a keyboard and purple
when IR remote and keyboard is used at the same
time.
HDD
Flickers in red when data is being read from or written
to HDD.
MODEM
Flickers in blue when network connection is
33
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
functioning properly.
Tx/Rx
GUARD
Turns blue when the device is in armed status; at this
time, an alarm is enabled when an event is detected.
Turns off when the device is unarmed. The
arm/disarm status can be changed by pressing and
holding on the ESC button for more than 3 seconds in
live view mode.
Turns red when a sensor alarm is detected.
2
IR Receiver
Receiver for IR remote
3
Front Panel Lock
Lock or unlock the panel by the key.
4
DVD-R/W
Slot for DVD-R/W.
Switches to the corresponding channel in live view or
PTZ control mode.
Inputs numbers and characters in edit mode.
5
Alphanumeric
Buttons
Switches between different channels in playback
mode.
Turns blue when the corresponding channel is
recording; turns red when the channel is in network
transmission status; turns pink when the channel is
recording and transmitting.
6
USB Interfaces
Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports for additional devices
such as USB mouse and USB Hard Disk Drive (HDD).
Returns to the previous menu.
ESC
Presses for arming/disarming the device in live view
mode.
7
Enters the Manual Record settings menu.
REC/SHOT
Presses this button followed by a numeric button to
call a PTZ preset in PTZ control settings.
34
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Turns audio on/off in the playback mode.
Enters the playback mode.
PLAY/AUTO
Automatically scans in the PTZ control menu.
ZOOM+
Zooms in the PTZ camera in the PTZ control setting.
Adjusts focus in the PTZ Control menu.
A/FOCUS+
Switches between input methods (upper and lower
case alphabet, symbols and numeric input).
Edits text fields. When editing text fields, it also
deletes the character in front of the cursor.
Checks the checkbox in the checkbox fields.
EDIT/IRIS+
Adjusts the iris of the camera in PTZ control mode.
Generates video clips for backup in playback mode.
Enters/exits the folder of USB device and eSATA HDD.
Switches between main and spot output.
MAIN/SPOT/ZOOMZooms out the image in PTZ control mode.
Selects all items on the list when used in a list field.
F1/ LIGHT
Turns on/off PTZ light (if applicable) in PTZ control
mode.
Switches between play and reverse play in playback
mode.
Cycles through tab pages.
F2/ AUX
MENU/WIPER
Switches between channels in synchronous playback
mode.
Returns to the Main menu (after successful login).
35
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Presses and holds the button for five seconds to turn
off audible key beep.
Starts wiper (if applicable) in PTZ control mode.
Shows/hides the control interface in playback mode.
Switches between single screen and multi-screen
mode.
PREV/FOCUSAdjusts the focus in conjunction with the A/FOCUS+
button in PTZ control mode.
Enters the PTZ Control mode.
PTZ/IRIS-
Adjusts the iris of the PTZ camera in PTZ control
mode.
Navigates between different fields and items in
menus.
Uses the Up and Down buttons to speed up and slow
down the playing of video files in Playback mode.
DIRECTION
The Left and Right button will select the next and
previous record files.
Cycles through channels in Live View mode.
Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ
control mode.
8
Confirms selection in any of the menu modes.
Checks the checkbox.
ENTER
Plays or pauses the playing of video files in Playback
mode.
Advances the video by a single frame in single-frame
Playback mode.
Stops/starts auto switch in Auto-switch mode.
36
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Moves the active selection up and down in a menu.
Cycles through different channels in live view mode.
9
JOG SHUTTLE
Control
Jumps 30s forward/backward in video files in the
playback mode.
Controls the movement of the PTZ camera in PTZ
control mode.
10
POWER ON/OFF
Power on/off switch.
1.2 IR Remote Control Operations
The DVR may also be controlled with the included IR remote control, shown in Figure 1-9.
Batteries (2×AAA) must be installed before operation.
Figure 1-9 Remote Control
37
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
The keys on the remote control closely resemble the ones found on the front panel. Refer to Table
1-7, they include:
Table 1-7 Description of the IR Remote Control Buttons
No.
Name
Description
Power on/off the device.
1
POWER
Power on/off the device by pressing and holding the
button for 5 seconds.
Press the button to return to the main menu (after
successful login).
Press and hold the button for 5 seconds will turn off
audible key beep.
2
MENU Button
In PTZ Control mode, the MENU button will start wiper
(if applicable).
In Playback mode, it is used to show/hide the control
interface.
Enter the Manual Record setting menu.
3
REC Button
In PTZ control settings, press the button and then you
can call a PTZ preset by pressing Numeric button.
It is also used to turn audio on/off in the Playback
mode.
Navigate between different fields and items in menus.
4
DIRECTION
Button
In the Playback mode, the Up and Down button is used
to speed up and slow down recorded video. The Left
and Right button will select the next and previous
record files.
In Live View mode, these buttons can be used to cycle
through channels.
In PTZ control mode, it can control the movement of the
PTZ camera.
38
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No.
Name
Description
Confirm selection in any of the menu modes.
It can also be used to tick checkbox fields.
ENTER Button
In Playback mode, it can be used to play or pause the
video.
In single-frame Playback mode, pressing the button will
advance the video by a single frame.
5
PTZ Button
In Auto-switch mode, it can be used to stop /start auto
switch.
6
DEV
Enables/Disables Remote Control.
Switch to the corresponding channel in Live view or PTZ
Control mode.
7
Alphanumeric
Buttons
Input numbers and characters in Edit mode.
Switch between different channels in the Playback
mode.
Back to the previous menu.
8
ESC Button
Press for Arming/disarming the device in Live View
mode.
The button is used to enter the All-day Playback mode.
9
PLAY Button
It is also used to auto scan in the PTZ Control menu.
Switch between single screen and multi-screen mode.
10
PREV Button
In PTZ Control mode, it is used to adjust the focus in
conjunction with the A/FOCUS+ button.
Troubleshooting Remote Control:
39
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Make sure you have install batteries properly in the remote control. And you have to aim the
remote control at the IR receiver in the front panel.
If there is no response after you press any button on the remote, follow the procedure below to
troubleshoot.
Step 1 Go into Menu > Configuration > General > More Settings by operating the front control panel
or the mouse.
Step 2 Check and remember the DVR No.. The default DVR No. is 255. This number valid for all IR
remote controls.
Step 3 Press the DEV button on the remote control.
Step 4 Enter the DVR No. in step 2.
Step 5 Press the ENTER button on the remote.
If the Status indicator on the front panel turns blue, the remote control is operating properly. If
the Status indicator does not turn blue and there is still no response from the remote, please
check the following:
Step 1 Batteries are installed correctly and the polarities of the batteries are not reversed.
Step 2 Batteries are fresh and not out of charge.
Step 3 IR receiver is not obstructed.
If the remote still cannot function properly, please change the remote and try again, or contact the
device provider.
1.3 USB Mouse Operation
A regular 3-button (Left/Right/Scroll-wheel) USB mouse can also be used with this DVR. To use a
USB mouse:
Step 1 Plug USB mouse into one of the USB interfaces on the front panel of the DVR.
Step 2 The mouse should automatically be detected. If in a rare case that the mouse is not detected,
the possible reason may be that the two devices are not compatible, please refer to the
recommended the device list from your provider.
The operation of the mouse:
Table 1-8 Description of the Mouse Control
Name
Left-Click
Action
Description
Single-Click
Live view: Select channel and show the quick set
menu.
Menu: Select and enter.
40
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Double-Click
Live view: Switch between single-screen and
multi-screen.
PTZ control: Wheeling.
Privacy mask and motion detection: Select target
area.
Drag
Digital zoom-in: Drag and select target area.
Live view: Drag channel/time bar.
Right-Click
Single-Click
Scrolling up
Live view: Show menu.
Menu: Exit current menu to upper level menu.
Live view: Previous screen.
Menu: Previous item.
Scroll-Wheel
Scrolling
down
Live view: Next screen.
Menu: Next item.
1.4 Input Method Description
Figure 1-10 Soft Keyboard
Description of the buttons on the soft keyboard:
Table 1-9 Description of the Soft Keyboard Icons
Icon
…
Description
Number
Lowercase/Uppercase
41
Icon
Description
…
English letter
Backspace
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Switch the keyboard
Space
Positioning the cursor
Enter
Symbols
Reserved
1.5 Rear Panel
The rear panel vaires according to different models. Please refer to the actual product. The
following figures are for reference only.
Rear Panel 1:
Figure 1-11 Rear Panel of DS-7100
Table 1-10 Description of Rear Panel
No.
Item
Description
1
VIDEO IN
BNC interface for Turbo HD, and analog video input.
2
HDMI
HDMI video output connector.
3
VGA
DB15 connector for VGA output. Display local video
output and menu.
4
AUDIO OUT
RCA connector.
5
AUDIO IN
RCA connector.
6
Network
Interface
Connector for network
7
USB Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional devices.
8
GND
Ground
42
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
9
Power Supply
12 VDC power supply.
Rear Panel 2:
Figure 1-12 Rear Panel of DS-7200HGHI-F (/N)
Rear Panel 3:
Figure 1-13 Rear Panel of DS-7200HGHI-E
Table 1-11 Description of Rear Panel
No.
Item
Description
1
VIDEO IN
BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
2
HDMI
HDMI video output connector.
3
VGA
DB15 connector for VGA output. Display local video
output and menu.
4
AUDIO OUT
RCA connector
5
AUDIO IN
RCA connector
6
Network
Interface
Connector for network
7
USB Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional devices.
8
Power Supply
12 VDC power supply.
43
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
9
GND
Ground
Rear Panel 4:
Figure 1-14 Rear Panel of DS-7200HQHI-F1/N
Rear Panel 5:
Figure 1-15 Rear Panel of DS-7200HQHI-F2/N
Table 1-12 Description of Rear Panel
No.
Item
Description
1
VIDEO IN
BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
2
AUDIO IN
RCA connector
3
AUDIO OUT
RCA connector
4
VGA
DB15 connector for VGA output. Display local
video output and menu.
5
HDMI
HDMI video output connector.
6
USB Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional
devices.
7
Network Interface
Connector for network
8
RS-485 Interface
Connector for RS-485 devices.
9
Power Supply
12VDC power supply.
10
Power Switch
Switch for turning on/off the device.
44
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
11
GND
Ground
12
VIDEO OUT
BNC connector for video output.
13
ALARM
Connector for alarm input/output.
Rear Panel 6:
Figure 1-16 Rear Panel of DS-7200HUHI and 7600HUHI-F/N
The rear panels of DS-7208HUHI provide 8 video input interfaces. The rear panel of DS-7216HUHI
provides 16 video input interfaces.
Table 1-13 Description of Rear Panel
No. Item
Description
1
VIDEO IN
BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
2
AUDIO IN
RCA connector
3
AUDIO OUT
RCA connector.
VGA
DB15 connector for VGA output. Display local
video output and menu.
HDMI
HDMI video output connector.
USB Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional
devices.
7
Network Interface
Connector for network
8
RS-485 Interface
Connector for RS-485 devices.
4
5
6
45
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No. Item
Description
9
Power Supply
12VDC power supply.
10
Power Switch
Switch for turning on/off the device.
11
GND
Ground
12
VIDEO OUT
BNC connector for video output.
13
Alarm In/Out
Connector for alarm input and output.
Rear Panel 7:
Figure 1-17 Rear Panel of DS-7300HQHI-F4/N
The rear panel of DS-7304HQHI-F4/N and DS-7308HQHI-F4/N provide 4 and 8 video input
interfaces respectively.
Rear Panel 8:
Figure 1-18 Rear Panel of DS-8100HQHI-F8/N
The rear panel of DS-8104HQHI-F8/N and DS-8108HQHI-F8/N provide 4 and 8 video input
interfaces respectively.
Table 1-14 Description of Rear Panel
No. Item
Description
1
BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
VIDEO IN
46
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No. Item
VIDEO OUT
2
3
Description
BNC connector for video output.
CVBS output is not provided by DS-7100/7200HGHI-E1,
DS-7200HGHI-E2, DS-7100/7200HGHI-F1,
DS-7200HGHI-F2, DS-7100HQHI-F1/N and
DS-7100HGHI-F1/N series DVR.
AUDIO IN
RCA connector
USB Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional
devices.
HDMI
HDMI video output connector.
VGA
DB15 connector for VGA output. Display local
video output and menu.
7
AUDIO OUT
RCA connector.
8
Network Interface
Connector for network
4
5
6
Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins
connect to R+ and R- pins of PTZ receiver
respectively.
9
RS-485 and Alarm
Interface
D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For
cascading devices, the first DVR’s D+, D- pin should
be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR.
Connector for alarm input.
Connector for alarm output.
10
Power Supply
100 to 240V AC power supply.
11
Power Switch
Switch for turning on/off the device.
12
GND
Ground
13
LINE IN
BNC connector for audio input.
47
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No. Item
Description
14
eSATA
Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVD-RW.
15
RS-232 Interface
Connector for RS-232 devices.
Rear Panel 9:
Figure 1-19 Rear Panel of DS-7300HUHI-F4/N
The rear panel of DS-7304HUHI-F4/N and DS-7308HUHI-F4/N provide 4 and 8 video input interfaces
respectively.
Rear Panel 10:
Figure 1-20 Rear Panel of DS-8100HUHI-F8/N
The rear panel of DS-8104HUHI-F8/N and DS-8108HUHI-F8/N provide 4 and 8 video input interfaces
respectively.
Rear Panel 11:
Figure 1-21 Rear Panel of DS-9000HUHI-F8/N
48
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
The rear panel of DS-9004HUHI-F8/N and DS-9008HUHI-F8/N provide 4 and 8 video input interfaces
respectively.
Table 1-15 Description of Rear Panel
No. Item
Description
1
VIDEO IN
BNC interface for Turbo HD and analog video input.
VIDEO OUT
BNC connector for video output.
2
3
CVBS output is not provided by DS-7100/7200HGHI-E1,
DS-7200HGHI-E2, DS-7100/7200HGHI-F1,
DS-7200HGHI-F2, DS-7100HQHI-F1/N and
DS-7100HGHI-F1/N series DVR.
AUDIO IN
RCA connector
USB Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional
devices.
HDMI1/VGA
Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local
video output and menu.
6
HDMI2
HDMI2 video output connector.
7
AUDIO OUT
RCA connector.
8
Network Interface
Connector for network
4
5
Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins
connect to R+ and R- pins of PTZ receiver
respectively.
9
RS-485 and Alarm
Interface
D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For
cascading devices, the first DVR’s D+, D- pin should
be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR.
Connector for alarm input.
Connector for alarm output.
10
Power Supply
100 to 240V AC power supply.
49
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
No. Item
Description
11
Power Switch
Switch for turning on/off the device.
12
GND
Ground
13
LINE IN
BNC connector for audio input.
14
eSATA
Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVD-RW.
15
RS-232 Interface
Connector for RS-232 devices.
Rear Panel 12:
Figure 1-22 Rear Panel of DS-9000HUHI-F16/N
The rear panel of DS-9008HUHI-F16/N provides 8 video input interfaces.
Table 1-16 Description of Rear Panel
No. Item
Description
1
VIDEO IN
BNC interface for TVI and analog video input.
VIDEO OUT
BNC connector for video output.
CVBS output is not provided by
DS-7100/7200HGHI-E1, DS-7200HGHI-E2,
DS-7100/7200HGHI-F1, DS-7200HGHI-F2,
DS-7100HQHI-F1/N, and DS-7100HGHI-F1/N series
DVR.
2
3
4
AUDIO IN
BNC connector
USB Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port for additional
devices.
50
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
HDMI1/VGA
Simultaneous HDMI1/VGA output. Display local
video output and menu.
6
HDMI2
HDMI2 video output connector.
7
AUDIO OUT
BNC connector.
8
Network Interface
Connector for network
5
Connector for RS-485 devices. T+ and T- pins
connect to R+ and R- pins of PTZ receiver
respectively.
9
RS-485 and
Interface
Alarm D+, D- pin connects to Ta, Tb pin of controller. For
cascading devices, the first DVR’s D+, D- pin should
be connected with the D+, D- pin of the next DVR.
Connector for alarm input.
Connector for alarm output.
10
Power Supply
100 to 240 VAC power supply.
11
Power Switch
Switch for turning on/off the device.
12
GND
Ground
13
LINE IN
BNC connector for audio input.
14
eSATA 1
Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVD-RW.
15
eSATA 2
Connects external SATA HDD, CD/DVD-RW.
16
RS-232 Interface
Connector for RS-232 devices.
17
ALARM OUT
Connector for alarm output.
51
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2.1 Starting Up and Shutting Down the DVR
Purpose
Proper startup and shutdown procedures are crucial to expanding the life of the DVR.
Before you start
Check that the voltage of the extra power supply is the same with the DVR’s requirement, and the
ground connection is working properly.
Starting up the DVR
Step 1 Check the power supply is plugged into an electrical outlet. It is HIGHLY recommended that
an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) be used in conjunction with the device.
Step 2 Turn on the power switch on the rear panel, and the Power indicator LED should turn on
indicating that the unit begins to start up.
Step 3 After startup, the Power indicator LED remains on.
Shutting down the DVR
There are two proper ways to shut down the DVR. To shut down the DVR:
 OPTION 1: Standard shutdown
Step 1 Enter the Shutdown menu.
Menu > Shutdown
Figure 2-1 Shutdown Menu
Step 2 Select the Shutdown button.
Step 3 Click the Yes button.
Step 4 Turn off the power switch on the rear panel when the note appears.
52
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-2 Shutdown Tips
Rebooting the DVR
While in the Shutdown menu (Figure 2-1), you can also reboot the DVR.
Step 1 Enter the Shutdown menu by clicking Menu > Shutdown.
Step 2 Click the Logout button to log out or the Reboot button to reboot the DVR.
2.2 Activating the Device
Purpose
For the first-time access, you need to activate the device by setting an admin password. No
operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the device via Web Browser, SADP or
Client Software.
Step 1 Input the same password in the text field of Create New Password and Confirm New
Password.
Figure 2-3 Settings Admin Password
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of
your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following
categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters.) in order to
increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly,
especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect
your product.
53
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 2 Click OK to save the password and activate the device.


Clear-text password is supported. Click the
icon and you can see the clear text of the
password. Click the icon again and the content of the password restores invisible.
For the old version device, if you update it to the new version, the following dialog box will
pop up once the device starts up. You can click YES and follow the wizard to set a strong
password.
Figure 2-4 Warning
Step 3 After the device is activated, the Attention box pops up as below.
Figure 2-5 Attention
Step 4 (Optional) Click Yes to export GUID. The Reset Password interface pops up. Click Export to
export GUID to the USB flash disk for password resetting.
Figure 2-6 Export GUID
54
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 5 After exporting GUID, the Attention box pops up as below. Click Yes to duplicate the
password or No to cancel it.
Figure 2-7 Duplicate the Password
2.3 Using the Unlock Pattern for Login
This chapter is only applicable for all the -F series DVR.
Purpose
For the admin, you can configure the unlock pattern for device login.
2.3.1 Configuring the Unlock Pattern
After the device is activated, you can enter the following interface to configure the device unlock
pattern.
Figure 2-8 Set Unlock Pattern
Step 1 Use the mouse to draw a pattern among the 9 dots on the screen. Release the mouse
when the pattern is done.
55
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-9 Draw the Pattern


Connect at least 4 dots to draw the pattern.
Each dot can be connected for once only.
Step 2 Draw the same pattern again to confirm it. When the two patterns match, the pattern is
configured successfully.
Figure 2-10 Confirm the Pattern
If the two patterns are different, you must set the pattern again.
56
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-11 Reset the Pattern
2.3.2 Logging in via Unlock Pattern


Only the admin user has the permission to unlock the device.
Please configure the pattern first before unlocking. Please refer to Chapter 2.3.1
Configuring the Unlock Pattern.
Step 1 Right click the mouse on the screen and select the menu to enter the interface.
Figure 2-12 Draw the Unlock Pattern
Step 2 Draw the pre-defined pattern to unlock to enter the menu operation.




You can right click the mouse to log in via the normal mode.
If you have forgotten your pattern, you can select the Forget My Pattern or Switch User
option to enter the normal login dialog box.
When the pattern you draw is different from the pattern you have configured, you should
try again.
If you have drawn the wrong pattern for 7 times, the account will be locked for 1 minute.
57
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-13 Normal Login Dialog Box
Figure 2-14 Lock the Account
58
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
2.4 Basic Configuration in Startup Wizard
Purpose
By default, the Setup Wizard starts once the device has loaded. You can follow it to complete the
basic configuration.
Selecting the language:
Step 1 Select the language from the dropdown list.
Step 2 Click Apply button.
Figure 2-15 Language Configuration
Operating the Setup Wizard:
Step 1 The Start Wizard can walk you through some important settings of the device. If you don’t
want to use the Start Wizard at that moment, click Exit. You can also choose to use the
Start Wizard next time by leaving the “Start wizard when device starts?” checkbox
checked.
Figure 2-16 Start Wizard Interface
Step 2 Click Next button to enter the Change the Password interface. Input the Admin Password
or change the password.
59
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-17 Change the Password
Clear-text password is supported. Click the
icon and you can see the clear text of the password.
Click the icon again and the content of the password restores invisible.
Step 3 Click Next button and the Attention box pops up as shown below. Click Yes to duplicate the
password of the device to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Or click No
to enter the Date and Time Settings interface.
Figure 2-18 Duplicate the Password
Figure 2-19 Date and Time Settings
Step 4 After the time settings, click Next button to enter the General Network Setup Wizard
interface as shown below.
60
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-20 General Network Configuration


DS-8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series have 2 self-adaptive
10M/100M/1000M network interfaces. For DS-8100HQHI-F/N series, three working modes
are configurable: multi-address, load balance and network fault tolerance. For
DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, only multi-address and network fault tolerance are
configurable. Other models have 1 self-adaptive 10M/100M/1000M network interface or 1
self-adaptive 10M/100Mbps network interface.
For all the -F series DVR, if DHCP is enabled, you can check the checkbox of Enable DNS
DHCP or uncheck it and edit the Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server.
Step 5 Click Next button after you configured the basic network parameters. Then you will enter
the Hik Cloud P2P interface. Configure the Hik Cloud P2P according to your need.
61
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-21 Hik Cloud P2P Interface
Step 6 Click Next button to enter the Advanced Network Parameters interface. You can enable
DDNS and set other ports according to your need.
Figure 2-22 Set Advanced Network Parameters
Step 7 For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, click Next button and you can enter the RAID
configuration interface. Check the checkbox of Enable RAID to take this function into
effect.
Figure 2-23 RAID Configuration
62
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 8 Click Next button after configuring the advanced network parameters, which will take you
to the HDD Management interface as shown below.
Figure 2-24 HDD Management
Step 9 To initialize the HDD, click the Init button. Initialization will remove all the data saved in the
HDD.
Step 10 Click Next button to enter the IP Camera Management interface.
Step 11 Add the IP camera.
1) Click Search to search the online IP Camera. The Security status shows whether it is active
or inactive. Before adding the camera, make sure the IP camera to be added is in active
status. If the camera is in inactive status, you can click the inactive icon of the camera to
set the password to activate it. You can also select multiple cameras from the list and click
the One-touch Activate to activate the cameras in batch.
2) Click the Add to add the camera.
3) (Optional) Check the checkbox of Enable H.265 (For Initial Access) for the connected IP
camera supporting H.265. Then the IP camera will be encoded with H.265.
The Enable H.265 option is only applicable to DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series.
63
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-25 IP Camera Management
Step 12 After finishing IP Camera settings, click Next to enter the Record Settings interface.
Step 13 Click the icon , and you can enable the continuous recording or motion detection
recording for all channels of the device.
Figure 2-26 Record Settings
Step 14 Click OK to complete the wizard settings.
2.5 Login and Logout
2.5.1 User Login
Purpose
You have to log in to the device before operating the menu and other functions
Step 1 Select the User Name in the dropdown list.
64
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-27 Login Interface
Step 2 Input the Password.
Step 3 Click OK to log in.


Clear-text password is supported. Click the
icon and you can see the clear text of the
password. Click the icon again and the content of the password restores invisible.
In the Login interface, for the admin, if you have entered the wrong password for 7 times,
the account will be locked for 60 seconds. For the operator, if you have entered the wrong
password for 5 times, the account will be locked for 60 seconds.
Figure 2-28 User Account Protection for the Admin
Figure 2-29 User Account Protection for the Operator
2.5.2 User Logout
Purpose
After logging out, the monitor turns to the live view mode and if you want to perform some
operations, you need to enter the user name and password to log in again.
Step 1 Enter the Shutdown menu.
Menu > Shutdown
65
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-30 Logout
Step 2 Click Logout.
After you have logged out of the system, menu operation on the screen is invalid. It is required to
input a user name and password to unlock the system.
2.6 Resetting Your Password
Purpose
When you forget the password of the admin, you can reset the password by importing the GUID
file. The GUID file must be exported and saved in the local USB flash disk after you have activated
the device (refer to Chapter 2.2 Activating the Device).
Step 1 On the user login interface, click Forget Password to pop up the Import GUID interface.
Figure 2-31 Import GUID
Step 2 Select the GUID file from the USB flash disk and click Import button to pop up the Reset
Password interface.
66
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-32 Reset Password
Step 3 Input the new password and confirm the password.
Step 4 Click OK to save the new password. Then the Attention box pops up as shown below.
Figure 2-33 GUID File Imported
Step 5 Click OK and the Attention box as below pops up to remind you to duplicate the password of
the device to IP cameras that are connected with default protocol. Click Yes to duplicate the
password or No to cancel it.
Figure 2-34 Duplicate the Password


If you want to retrieve the password when you forget it, you must export the GUID file first.
Once the password is reset, the GUID file will be invalid. You can export a new GUID file.
Refer to Chapter 17.5.3 Editing a User for reference.
2.7 Adding and Connecting the IP Cameras
2.6.1 Activating the IP Camera
The IP camera connection is not supported by DS-7100 series DVR.
67
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Purpose
Before adding the camera, make sure the IP camera to be added is in active status.
Step 1 Select the Add IP Camera option from the right-click menu in live view mode or click
Menu> Camera> IP Camera to enter the IP Camera Management interface.
For the IP camera detected online in the same network segment, the Security status shows
whether it is active or inactive.
Figure 2-35 IP Camera Management Interface
Step 2 Click the inactive icon of the camera to enter the following interface to activate it. You can
also select multiple cameras from the list and click the One-touch Activate to activate the
cameras in batch.
Figure 2-36 Activate the Camera
Step 3 Set the password of the camera to activate it.
Use Admin Password: When you check the checkbox, the camera (s) will be configured
with the same admin password of the operating DVR.
Create New Password: If the admin password is not used, you must create the new
password for the camera and confirm it.
68
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-37 Set New Password
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of
your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following
categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters.) in order to
increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly,
especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect
your product.
Step 4 Click OK to finish the acitavting of the IP camera. And the security status of camera will be
changed to Active.
2.6.2 Adding the Online IP Camera
Purpose
Before you can get a live view or record of the video, you should add the network cameras to the
connection list of the device.
Before you start
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct. For detailed checking and configuring of the
network, please see Chapter 12 Network Settings.

OPTION 1:
Step 1 Select the Add IP Camera option from the right-click menu in live view mode or click
Menu> Camera> IP Camera to enter the IP Camera Management interface.
69
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-38 IP Camera Management Interface
Step 2 The online cameras with same network segment will be detected and displayed in the
camera list.
Step 3 Select the IP camera from the list and click the
button to add the camera (with the
same admin password of the DVR’s). Or you can click the One-touch Adding button to add
all cameras (with the same admin password) from the list.
Make sure the camera to add has already been actiavted by setting the admin password, and the
admin password of the camera is the same with the DVR’s.
Step 4 (Optional) For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, check the checkbox of Enable
H.265 (For Initial Access) for the connected IP camera supporting H.265. Then the IP camera
will be encoded with H.265.
Step 5 (For the encoders with multiple channels only) check the checkbox of Channel Port in the
pop-up window, as shown in the following figure, and click OK to add multiple channels.
70
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-39 Select Multiple Channels

OPTION 2:
Step 1 On the IP Camera Management interface, click the Custom Adding button to pop up the
Add IP Camera (Custom) interface.
Figure 2-40 Custom Adding IP Camera Interface
Step 2 You can edit the IP address, protocol, management port, and other information of the IP
camera to be added.
If the IP camera to add has not been actiavated, you can activate it from the IP camera list on the
IP Camera Management interface.
Step 3 Click Add to add the camera.
For the successfully added IP cameras, the Security status shows the security level of the
password of camera: strong password, weak password and risky password.
71
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-41 Successfully Added IP Cameras
Please refer to Chapter 18.1 Specifications for the number of connectable IP cameras for different
models.
Table 2-1 Explanation of the Icons
Icon
Explanation
Icon
Explanation
Edit basic parameters of
the camera
Add the detected IP camera.
The camera is
disconnected; You can click
the icon to get the
exception information of
camera.
Delete the IP camera
Play the live video of the
connected camera.
Advanced settings of the
camera.
Upgrade the connected IP
camera.
Shows the security status of
the camera to be
Security active/inactive or the
password strength
(strong/medium/weak/risky)
Step 4 (Optional) For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, check the checkbox of Enable
H.265 (For Initial Access) for the connected IP camera supporting H.265. Then the IP camera
will be encoded with H.265.
72
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
2.6.3 Editing the Connected IP Camera
Purpose
After the adding of the IP cameras, the basic information of the camera is listed on the interface,
and you can configure the basic settings of the IP cameras.
Step 1 Click the
icon to edit the parameters. You can edit the IP address, protocol and other
parameters.
Figure 2-42 Edit IP Camera
Channel Port: If the connected device is an encoding device with multiple channels, you can
choose the channel to connect by selecting the channel port No. in the dropdown list.
Step 2 Click OK to save the settings and exit from the editing interface.
Step 3 Drag the horizontal scroll bar to the right side and click the
parameters.
icon to edit the advanced
Figure 2-43 Network Configuration of the Camera
Step 4 You can edit the network information and the password of the camera.
73
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-44 Password Configuration of the Camera
Step 5 Click OK to save the settings and exit the interface.
2.8 Viewing Signal Input Status
The Single Input Status interface is only available for DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR.
Purpose
For DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR, you can view the analog signal input channels and types and the
connectable maximum IP camera number, and configure 5MP long distance transmission.
Step 1 Enter the Signal Input Status interface.
Menu > Camera > Signal Input Status
Figure 2-45 View Signal Input Type (2)
Step 2 View the analog signal input channels and types, and the connectable maximum IP camera
number.
Step 3 (Optional) You can enable 5 MP Long Distance Transmission for the Turbo HD and AHD
signal input. Follow the steps below to enable the function.
1) Click
to enter the 5 MP Long Distance Transmission Settings interface.
74
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 2-46 5 MP Long Distance Transmission Settings
2) Check the checkbox(es) to enable 5 MP Long Distance Transmission of the selected
channel(s).
3) Click Apply to save the settings and OK to return to the Signal Input Status interface.





For -E series DVR, each two video channels are grouped in sequence, e.g., CH01 and CH02,
CH03 and CH04...; and each two channels in the same group must be connected with the
same type of video source (Turbo HD or CVBS).
For –F series DVR, you do not need to configure the signal inputs. The analog signal inputs
(Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, CVBS) and IP signal input can be recognized and connected
automatically.
For HQHI series DVR, the 3 MP signal can be accessed for the first channel of DVR with 4-ch
video inputs, the first 2 channels of DVR with 8-ch video inputs and the first 4 channels of
DVR with 16-ch video inputs.
For all the –F series DVR, when Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, the
information including the resolution and frame rate (e.g., 720P25) will be overlaid on the
bottom right corner of the live view for 5 seconds. When CVBS input is connected, the
information such as NTSC or PAL will be overlaid on the bottom right corner of the live view
for 5 seconds. When there is no video signal for the channel, the connectable video signal
type message will not be displayed on the screen. When the unsupported signal input is
connected, no video message is displayed on the screen. You can refer to the specifications
for the supported resolution of the analog signal input types.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR, disabling one
analog channel will add one IP channel. For DS-7300/8100HUHI-F/N and
DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series, the accessible IP channels are X+2 (X refers to the disabled
analog channel or channels of the DVR.). For DS-9004HUHI-F8/N series, the accessible IP
channels are X+6 (X refers to the disabled analog channel or channels of the DVR.). For
DS-9008HUHI-F/N series, the accessible IP channels are X+10 (X refers to the disabled
analog channel or channels of the DVR.). For DS-9016HUHI-F/N series, the accessible IP
channels are X+18 (X refers to the disabled analog channel or channels of the DVR.) and the
max. IP channels are 32.
75
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 3 Live View
3.1 Introduction of Live View
Live view shows you the video image getting from each camera in real time. The DVR will
automatically enter Live View mode when powered on. It is also at the very top of the menu
hierarchy, thus hitting the ESC many times (depending on which menu you’re on) will bring you to
the Live View mode.
Live View Icons
In the live view mode, there are icons at the right top of the screen for each channel, showing the
status of the record and alarm in the channel, so that you can know whether the channel is
recorded, or whether there are alarms occur as soon as possible.
Table 3-1 Description of Live View Icons
Icons
Description
Alarm (video loss, tampering, motion detection, VCA or sensor
alarm)
Record (manual record, schedule record, motion detection or
alarm triggered record)
Alarm & Record
Event/Exception (motion detection, sensor alarm or exception
information. For details, see Chapter 8.6 Handling Exceptions.)
3.2 Operations in Live View Mode
In live view mode, there are many functions provided. The functions are listed below.
 Single Screen: show only one screen on the monitor.
 Multi-screen: show multiple screens on the monitor simultaneously.
76
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
 Start Auto-switch: the screen is auto switched to the next one. And you must set the dwell
time for each screen on the configuration menu before enabling the auto-switch.
Menu>Configuration>Live View>Dwell Time.
 Start Recording: normal record and motion detection record are supported.
 Output Mode: select the output mode to Standard, Bright, Gentle or Vivid.
 Playback: play back the recorded videos for current day.
 Aux/Main Monitor: the DVR checks the connection of the output interfaces to define the
main and auxiliary output interfaces. When the aux output is enabled, the main output cannot
do any operation, and you can do some basic operation on the live view mode for the Aux
output.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, there are two HDMI interfaces. HDMI1 and VGA
interfaces share simultaneous output. The priority level for the main and aux output is HDMI2>
VGA/HDMI1. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output. The priority
relationship is shown as Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Priorities of Outputs for DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N Series
S.N HDMI2 VGA/HDMI1 CVBS
Main
output
Auxiliary
output
For Live View
Output Only
1
√
√
√ or ×
HDMI2
VGA/HDMI1
CVBS
2
√ or ×
×
√ or ×
HDMI2
CVBS
VGA/HDMI1
3
×
√
√ or ×
VGA/HDMI1
CVBS
HDMI2
For DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR, the HDMI and VGA interfaces
can be configured to be simultaneous or independent.
For DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR with CVBS output, if the HDMI
and VGA interfaces are configured to be independent, the priority level of the main and aux
output is HDMI > VGA. The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output. The
priority relationship is shown as Table 3-3. If the HDMI and VGA interfaces are configured to be
simultaneous, the VGA/HDMI output is the main output. The CVBS output is the aux output. The
priority relationship is shown as Table 3-4.
Table 3-3 Priorities of Independent Outputs for DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N
Series
S.N HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output For Live View Output Only
1
√
√
√ or ×
HDMI
VGA
CVBS
2
√ or ×
×
√ or ×
HDMI
CVBS
VGA
77
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
S.N HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output For Live View Output Only
3
×
√
√ or ×
VGA
CVBS
HDMI
Table 3-4 Priorities of Simultaneous Outputs for DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N
Series
S.N HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output
1
√ or ×
√ or × √ or ×
VGA/HDMI
CVBS
For DS-7200HQHI-F/N and DS-7200/7604HUHI series DVR with CVBS output, the VGA/HDMI
output is the main output, and the CVBS output is the aux output. The priority relationship is
shown as Table 3-5.
For HGHI-F/N, HGHI-F, DS-7100HQHI-F/N series DVR, there is no CVBS output. The VGA/HDMI
output is the main output. The priority relationship is shown as Table 3-6.
Table 3-5 Priorities of Outputs for DS-7200HQHI-F/N and DS-7200/7604HUHI Series
S.N HDMI VGA CVBS Main output Auxiliary output
1
√ or ×
√ or × √ or ×
VGA/HDMI
CVBS
Table 3-6 Priorities of Outputs for HGHI-F/N, HGHI-F, DS-7100HQHI-F/N Series
S.N HDMI VGA Main output
1
√ or ×
√ or × VGA/HDMI
√ means the interface is in use, × means the interface is out of use or the connection is invalid. And
the HDMI, VGA and CVBS can be used at the same time.
3.2.1 Using the Mouse in Live View
You can refer to Table 3-7 for the description of mouse operation in live view mode.
Table 3-7 Mouse Operation in Live View
Name
Description
Menu
Enter the main menu of the system by right clicking the
mouse.
Single Screen Switch to the single full screen by choosing channel number
from the dropdown list.
78
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Multi-Screen
Adjust the screen layout by selecting from the dropdown list.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, if the sum of the analog
and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window division mode is
supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.
Previous
Screen
Switch to the previous screen.
Next Screen
Switch to the next screen.
Start/Stop
Auto-Switch
Enable/disable the auto-switch of the screens.
The dwell time of the live view configuration must be set before using
Start Auto-Switch.
Start
Recording
Start recording of all channels, Continuous Record and
Motion Detection Record are selectable from the dropdown
list.
Add IP
Camera
A shortcut to enter the IP camera management interface.(For
HDVR series only)
Playback
Enter the playback interface and start playing back the video
of the selected channel immediately.
PTZ Control
A shortcut to enter the PTZ control interface of the selected
camera.
Output
Mode
Output Mode is configurable with Standard, Bright, Gentle
and Vivid options.
Aux Monitor
Switch to the auxiliary output mode and the operation for the
main output is disabled.
If you enter Aux monitor mode and the Aux monitor is not connected,
the mouse operation is disabled. You need to switch back to the Main
output with the F1 button on front panel or VOIP/MON button on IR
remote control and then press the Enter button.
79
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 3-1 Right-click Menu
3.2.2 Switching Main/Aux Output


Except –HGHI and DS-7100HQHI-F/N series DVR, other series DVR support Aux/Main
output switch. Refer to the tables of Chapter 3.2 Operations in Live View Mode for the main
and aux output relationship.
For the DVR with CVBS output, the CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view
output.
Step 1 Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the HDMI1/VGA, or HDMI2, or HDMI/VGA, or
HDMI, or VGA output screen, and the following message box pops up.
Figure 3-2 Switch Main and Aux Output
Step 2 Use the mouse wheel to double-click on the screen again to switch to the aux output, or
click Cancel to cancel the operation.
Step 3 Select the Menu Output Mode to others from the right-click menu on the monitor.
Step 4 On the pop-up message box, click Yes to reboot the device to enable the selected menu
output as the main output.
You can select the Menu Output Mode under Menu>Configuration>General>More Settings to
Auto, HDMI1/VGA and HDMI2 (for DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N) or Auto, HDMI and VGA (for
80
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
independent output configuration of DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and
DS-7116/7216/7300/8100HQHI-F/N series), Auto and HDMI/VGA (for HGHI-F/N, HGHI-F,
DS-7100/7200HQHI-F/N and DS-7200/7604HUHI series or simultaneous output configuration of
DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series) and then reboot the device to switch
the main output.
3.2.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode
On the screen of each channel, there is a quick setting toolbar which shows when you click the
screen.
Figure 3-3 Quick Setting Toolbar
You can refer to Table 3-8 for the description of Quick Setting Toolbar icons.
Table 3-8 Description of Quick Setting Toolbar Icons
Icons
/
Description
Icons
Description
Icons
Description
Enable/Disable
Manual Record
Instant Playback
PTZ Control
Digital Zoom
Image Settings
Close Live View
Face Detection
Information
Capture
/
Mute/Audio on
Show/Hide VCA
Information
/
Picture capture is only applicable to DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR.
Instant Playback only shows the record in last five minutes. If no record is found, it means
there is no record during the last five minutes.
Digital Zoom can zoom in the selected area to the full screen. Click and draw to select the
area to zoom in, as shown in Figure 3-4.
81
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 3-4 Digital Zoom
Image Settings icon can be selected to enter the Image Settings menu. You can drag the mouse
or click
to adjust the image parameters, including brightness, contrast, and saturation. Refer
to the Chapter 15.3 Configuring Video Parameters for details.
Figure 3-5 Image Settings
Face Detection can be enabled if you click the icon. The dialog pops up as shown in Figure 3-6.
Click Yes and the full-screen live view of the channel is enabled. You can click
full-screen mode.
to exit from the
Figure 3-6 Enable Face Detection
You can configure face detection only when it is supported by the connected camera.
82
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Move the mouse onto the Information icon to show the real-time stream information,
including the frame rate, bit rate, resolution and stream type.
Figure 3-7 Information
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, when H.264 IP camera is connected, the stream type
is displayed as H.264. When Smart 264 IP camera is connected, the stram type is displayed as
H.264+. When H.265 IP camera is connected, the stream type is displayed as H.265. When Smart
265 IP camera is connected, the stram type is displayed as H.265+.
For the analog cameras supporting VCA, click the icon to show the VCA information. Then the
configured line or quadrilateral in the VCA configuration and target frame(s) will be shown on the
live view. Click the icon again to hide the VCA information.
Figure 3-8 Enable VCA Information Overlay







In the live view, only the analog cameras support VCA information overlay.
Enable VCA function first before showing the VCA information. Refer to Chapter 10 VCA
Alarm for the detailed operation.
The VCA information is hidden by default. If the connected analog camera does not support
VCA, the icon displays grey and cannot be operated.
For the analog cameras, the VCA information includes line crossing detection and intrusion
detection.
The DVR only supports VCA information overlay of one channel. If you enable the function
of one channel, the other channels will disable the function automatically.
Both single window and multi-window display modes support VCA information overlay.
Only the main output supports VCA information overlay. When switching to the aux output,
the VCA information overlay of main output is disabled.
83
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

For the analog cameras, if the camera number does not exceed the limit for line crossing
detection and intrusion detection, the VCA information overlay can be enabled for all the
analog cameras enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection. If the camera
number exceeds the limit for line crossing detection, intrusion detection and sudden scene
change detection, only the cameras enabled line crossing detection and intrusion detection
support VCA information overlay. Disabling line crossing detection and intrusion detection
remotely will not affect the VCA information overlay in the local live view.
3.3 Channel-Zero Encoding
This chapter is not applicable to DS-7100/7200HGHI-E1/E2 series DVR.
Purpose
Sometimes you need to get a remote view of many channels in real time from web browser or
CMS (Client Management System) software, in order to decrease the bandwidth requirement
without affecting the image quality, channel-zero encoding is supported as an option for you.
Step 1 Enter the Live View Settings interface.
Menu> Configuration> Live View
Step 2 Select the Channel-Zero Encoding tab.
Figure 3-9 Live View- Channel-Zero Encoding
Step 3 Check the checkbox after Enable Channel-Zero Encoding.
Step 4 Configure the Frame Rate, Max. Bitrate Mode and Max. Bitrate.
Step 5 Click the Apply button to activate the settings.
Step 6 After you set the Channel-Zero encoding, you can get a view in the remote client or web
browser of 16 channels in one screen.
3.4 Adjusting Live View Settings
Purpose
84
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Live View settings can be customized according to different needs. You can configure the output
interface, dwell time for screen to be shown, mute or turning on the audio, the screen number for
each channel, etc.
Step 1 Enter the Live View Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Live View > General
Figure 3-10 Live View-General (1)
Figure 3-11 Live View-General (2)
The settings available in this menu include:

Video Output Interface: Selects the output to configure the settings.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, you can select VGA/HDMI1, HDMI2, Main CVBS
for video output interface.
For DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR with CVBS output, if you
have configured HDMI/VGA simultaneous output, you can select Main CVBS, HDMI/VGA for
the video output interface. If you have configured independent HDMI and VGA output, you
can select Main CVBS, HDMI and VGA for the video output interface.
For other models, if CVBS output is supported, you can select Main CVBS and HDMI/VGA for
video output interface. If CVBS output is not supported, HDMI/VGA serves as the video output
interface.

Live View Mode: Selects the display mode to be used for Live View.

Dwell Time: The time in seconds to dwell between switching of channels when enabling
auto-switch in Live View.

Enable Audio Output: Enables/disables audio output for the selected camera in the live view
mode.

Volume: Adjust the volume of the audio output.

Event Output: Designates the output to show event video. If available, you can select a
different video output interface from the Video Output Interface when an event occurs.
85
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Full Screen Monitoring Dwell Time: The time in seconds to show alarm event screen.
Step 2 Set the camera order.
1) Click View tab and select the Video Output Interface from the dropdown list.
Figure 3-12 Live View-Camera Order
2) Click a window to select it, and then double-click a camera name in the camera list you
would like to display. Setting an ‘X’ means the window will not display any camera.
3) You can also click
to start live view of all channels in order and click
view of all channels. Click
or
to go to the previous or next page.
to stop live
4) Click the Apply button.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, if the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25,
up to 32-window division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output.
3.5 Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
Purpose
The video quality of the analog channels can be diagnosed manually and you can view the
diagnostic results from a list.
Step 1 Enter the Manual Video Quality Diagnostics interface.
Menu> Manual >Manual Video Quality Diagnostics
Figure 3-13 Video Quality Diagnostics
86
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 2 Check the checkboxes to select the channels for diagnostics.
Step 3 Click the button Diagnose, and the results will be displayed on a list. You can view the video
status and diagnostics time of the selected channels.
Figure 3-14 Diagnostics Result


Connect the camera to the device for the video quality diagnostics.
Three exception types can be diagnosed: Blurred Image, Abnormal Brightness and Color
Cast.
87
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 4 PTZ Controls
4.1 Configuring PTZ Settings
Purpose
Follow the procedure to set the parameters for PTZ. The configuring of the PTZ parameters should
be done before you control the PTZ camera.
Step 1 Enter the PTZ Settings interface.
Menu >Camera> PTZ
Figure 4-1 PTZ Settings
Step 2 Select the camera for PTZ setting in the Camera dropdown list.
Step 3 Click the PTZ Parameters button to set the PTZ parameters.
88
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 4-2 PTZ- General
Step 4 Select the parameters of the PTZ camera from the dropdown list.



All the parameters should be exactly the same as the PTZ camera parameters.
For the Coaxitron camera/dome connected, you can select the PTZ protocol to UTC
(Coaxitron). Make sure the protocol selected here is supported by the connected
camera/dome.
When the Coaxitron protocol is selected, all the other parameters like the baud rate, data
bit, stop bit, parity and flow control are not configurable.
Step 5 (Optional) Click Copy button to copy the settings to the other channels. Select the channels
you want to copy to and click OK to return to the PTZ Parameters Settings interface.
Figure 4-3 Copy to Other Channels
Step 6 Click OK to save the settings.
89
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 7 (Optional) Check the checkbox of Enable Omnicast Control to enable the PTZ control of the
selected camera via Omnicast VMS of Genetec.
4.2 Setting PTZ Presets, Patrols and Patterns
Before you start
Please make sure that the presets, patrols and patterns should be supported by PTZ protocols.
4.2.1 Customizing Presets
Purpose
Follow the steps to set the Preset location which you want the PTZ camera to point to when an
event takes place.
Step 1 Enter the PTZ Settings interface.
Menu>Camera>PTZ
Figure 4-4 PTZ Settings
Step 2 Use the directional button to wheel the camera to the location where you want to set
preset; and the zoom and focus operations can be recorded in the preset as well.
Step 3 Enter the preset No. (1~255) in the preset text field, and click the Set button to link the
location to the preset.
Repeat the steps from 2 to 3 to save more presets.
You can click the Clear button to clear the location information of the preset, or click the
Clear All button to clear the location information of all the presets.
90
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
4.2.2 Calling Presets
Purpose
This feature enables the camera to point to a specified position such as a window when an event
takes place.
Step 1 Click the button PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ setting interface;
Or press the PTZ button on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon
in the quick
setting bar, or select the PTZ option in the right-click menu to show the PTZ control panel.
Step 2 Choose Camera in the dropdown list.
Step 3 Click the General tab to show the general settings of the PTZ control.
Figure 4-5 PTZ Panel-General
Step 4 Click to enter the preset No. in the corresponding text field.
Step 5 Click the Call Preset button to call it.
When the Coaxitron camera/dome connected and the PTZ protocol is selected to UTC (Coaxitron),
you can call the preset 95 to enter the menu of the connected Coaxitron camera/dome. Use the
directional buttons on the PTZ control panel to operate the menu.
4.2.3 Customizing Patrols
Purpose
Patrols can be set to move the PTZ to different key points and have it stay there for a set duration
before moving on to the next key point. The key points are corresponding to the presets. The
presets can be set following the steps above in Customizing Presets.
Step 1 Enter the PTZ Settings interface.
Menu>Camera>PTZ
91
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 4-6 PTZ Settings
Step 2 Select patrol No. in the drop-down list of patrol.
Step 3 Click the Set button to add key points for the patrol.
Figure 4-7 Key point Configuration
Step 4 Configure key point parameters, such as the key point No., duration of staying for one key
point and speed of patrol. The key point is corresponding to the preset. The Key Point No.
determines the order at which the PTZ will follow while cycling through the patrol. The
Duration refers to the time span to stay at the corresponding key point. The Speed defines
the speed at which the PTZ will move from one key point to the next.
Step 5 Click the Add button to add the next key point to the patrol, or you can click the OK button
to save the key point to the patrol.
You can delete all the key points by clicking the Clear button for the selected patrol, or click
the Clear All button to delete all the key pints for all patrols.
4.2.4 Calling Patrols
Purpose
Calling a patrol makes the PTZ to move according the predefined patrol path.
92
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 1 Click the button PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface;
Or press the PTZ button on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon
in the quick
setting bar, or select the PTZ option in the right-click menu to show the PTZ control panel.
Step 2 Click the General tab to show the general settings of the PTZ control.
Figure 4-8 PTZ Panel - General
Step 3 Select a patrol in the dropdown list and click the Call Patrol button to call it.
Step 4 You can click the Stop Patrol button to stop calling it.
4.2.5 Customizing Patterns
Purpose
Patterns can be set by recording the movement of the PTZ. You can call the pattern to make the
PTZ movement according to the predefined path.
Step 1 Enter the PTZ Settings interface.
Menu > Camera > PTZ
93
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 4-9 PTZ Settings
Step 2 Choose pattern number in the dropdown list.
Step 3 Click the Start button and click corresponding buttons in the control panel to move the PTZ
camera, and click the Stop button to stop it.
The movement of the PTZ is recorded as the pattern.
4.2.6 Calling Patterns
Purpose
Follow the procedure to move the PTZ camera according to the predefined patterns.
Step 1 Click the button PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface;
Or press the PTZ button on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon
in the quick
setting bar, or select the PTZ option in the right-click menu to show the PTZ control panel.
Step 2 Click the General tab to show the general settings of the PTZ control.
94
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 4-10 PTZ Panel - General
Step 3 Click the Call Pattern button to call it.
Step 4 Click the Stop Pattern button to stop calling it.
4.2.7 Customizing Linear Scan Limit
Purpose
The Linear Scan can be enabled to trigger the scan in the horizantal direction in the predefined
range.
This function is supported by some certain models.
Step 1 Enter the PTZ Settings interface.
Menu > Camera > PTZ
95
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 4-11 PTZ Settings
Step 2 Use the directional button to wheel the camera to the location where you want to set the
limit, and click the Left Limit or Right Limit button to link the location to the corresponding
limit.
The speed dome starts linear scan from the left limit to the right limit, and you must set the left
limit on the left side of the right limit, as well the angle from the left limit to the right limit should
be no more than 180º.
4.2.8 Calling Linear Scan
Purpose
Follow the procedure to call the linear scan in the predefined scan range.
Step 1 Click the button PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface;
Or press the PTZ button on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon
setting bar to enter the PTZ setting menu in live view mode.
Step 2 Click the One-touch tab to show the one-touch function of the PTZ control.
96
in the quick
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 4-12 PTZ Panel - One-touch
Step 3 Click Linear Scan button to start the linear scan and click the Linear Scan button again to
stop it.
You can click the Restore button to clear the defined left limit and right limit data and the
dome needs to reboot to make settings take effect.
4.2.9 One-Touch Park
Purpose
For some certain model of the speed dome, it can be configured to start a predefined park action
(scan, preset, patrol and etc.) automatically after a period of inactivity (park time).
Step 1 Click the button PTZ in the lower-right corner of the PTZ Settings interface;
Or press the PTZ button on the front panel or click the PTZ Control icon
setting bar to enter the PTZ setting menu in live view mode.
Step 2 Click the One-touch tab to show the one-touch function of the PTZ control.
Figure 4-13 PTZ Panel - One-touch
97
in the quick
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 3 There are 3 one-touch park types selectable. Click the corresponding button to activate the
park action.
Park (Quick Patrol): The dome starts patrol from the predefined preset 1 to preset 32 in
order after the park time. The undefined preset will be skipped.
Park (Patrol 1): The dome starts moving according to the predefined patrol 1 path after the
park time.
Park (Preset 1): The dome moves to the predefined preset 1 location after the park time.
The park time can only be set through the speed dome configuration interface. The default value is
5s.
Step 4 Click the button again to inactivate it.
4.3 PTZ Control Panel
To enter the PTZ control panel, there are two ways supported.
OPTION 1:
In the PTZ Settings interface, click the PTZ button on the lower-right corner which is next to the
Back button.
OPTION 2:
In the Live View mode, you can press the PTZ Control button on the front panel or on the remote
control, or choose the PTZ Control icon
in the quick setting bar, or select the PTZ Control
option in the right-click menu.
Click the Configuration button on the control panel, and you can enter the PTZ Settings interface.
In PTZ control mode, the PTZ panel will be displayed when a mouse is connected with the device. If
no mouse is connected, the
icon appears in the lower-left corner of the window, indicating
that this camera is in PTZ control mode.
98
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 4-14 PTZ Control Panel
You can refer to Table 4-1 for the description of the PTZ panel icons.
Table 4-1 Description of the PTZ panel icons
Icon
Description
Icon
Description
Icon
Description
Direction
button and the
auto-cycle
button
Zoom+, Focus+,
Iris+
Zoom-, Focus-,
Iris-
The speed of
the PTZ
movement
Light on/off
Wiper on/off
3D-Zoom
Image
Centralization
Menu
Switch to the
PTZ control
interface
Switch to the
one-touch
control
interface
Switch to the
general settings
interface
Exit
Minimize
windows
99
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 5 Recording and Capture Settings
The picture capture is supported by the DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR only.
5.1 Configuring Encoding Parameters
Before you start
Step 1 Make sure that the HDD has already been installed. If not, please install a HDD and initialize
it. (Menu>HDD>General)
Figure 5-1 HDD- General
Step 2 Click Advanced tab to check the storage mode of the HDD. (Menu>HDD>Advanced>Storage
Mode)
1) If the HDD mode is Quota, please set the maximum record capacity. For detailed
information, see Chapter 14.4 Configuring Quota Mode.
2) If the HDD mode is Group, you should set the HDD group. For detailed information, see
Chapter 5.9 Configuring HDD Group.
Figure 5-2 HDD- Advanced
Steps
Step 1 Enter the Record Parameters interface to configure the encoding parameters.
Menu>Record>Parameters
100
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-3 Record Parameters
Step 2 Set the parameters for recording.
1) Select the Record tab to configure.
2) Select a camera from the camera dropdown list.
3) View the Camera Resolution.
For -F series DVR, when Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, you can view the information
including the input signal type, resolution and frame rate (e.g., 5 MP 20 Hz). When CVBS input is
connected, you can view the information such as NTSC or PAL.
4) Configure the following parameters for the Main Stream (Continuous) and the Main
Stream (Event): Stream Type: Set the stream type to be Video or Video & Audio.
Resolution: Set recording resolution.




The HQHI series DVR support up to 3 MP resultion for the first channel of DVR with 4-ch
video inputs, the first 2 channels of DVR with 8-ch video inputs and the first 4 channels of
DVR with 16-ch video inputs. When the 3 MP signal input is connected to the supported
channel, the recording resolution will be adjusted to 3 MP and the frame rate will be
adjusted to 12 fps automatically if the resolution and frame rate is not confiugred manually.
The DS-7200/7300/7600/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series support up to 3 MP resolution of all the
channels.
The DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR support 5 MP and 4 MP resolution of all the channels.
For HQHI and DS-7200HUHI series DVR, if the 3 MP camera is connected to the channel
which supports up to 1080p signal input, it will switch to 1080p signal input. When the 3
101
Digital Video Recorder User Manual




MP signal is switched to 1080p signal, the PAL will be switched to 1080p/25Hz, and the
NTSC will be switched to 1080p/30Hz.
For all the –F series DVR, the analog signal inputs (Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, CVBS) and IP
signal input can be recognized and connected automatically.
If the configured encoding resolution conflicts with the resolution of the front-end camera,
the encoding parameters will adjust automatically to meet the front-end camera. E.g., if the
resolution of the front-end camera is 720p, then the encoding resolution of the main
stream will adjust to 720p automatically.
The resolution of 960 × 1080 (1080P Lite) is avaiable when the 1080P Lite is enabled in the
Record>Advanced Settings interface (refer to Chapter 5.12 Configuring 1080P Lite).
Please refer to the Appendix-Specifications for the supported resolutions of different
models.
Bitrate Type: Set the bitrate type to be Variable or Constant.
Video Quality: Set the video quality of recording, with 6 levels configurable.
The Stream Type, Resolution, Bitrate Type and Video Quality are not configurable for the Main
Stream (Event) of the IP Camera.
Frame Rate: Set the frame rate of recording.



For DS-7200/7300/7600/8100/9000HUHI series, when 3 MP signal input is connected, the
frame rate of the main stream cannot exceed 15 fps.
For DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR, when 5 MP signal input is connected, the frame rate of
the main stream cannot exceed 10 fps. When 4 MP signal input is connected, the frame rate
of the main stream cannot exceed 15 fps.
For DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR, the 5 MP20 signal input supports 20 fps in live view, and
the 4 MP25 and 4 MP30 signal inputs support real-time frame rate in live view.
Max. Bitrate Mode: Set the mode to General or Custom.
Max Bitrate (Kbps): Select or customize the maximum bit rate for recording.
Max. Bitrate Range Recommended: A recommended max. bit rate range is provided for
reference.
Max. Average Bitrate (Kbps): Set the max. average bit rate which refers to the average
amount of data transferred per unit of time.
Video Encoding: For 7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, you can select H.264 or H.265 for the
IP camera.
When the connected IP camera does not support H.265, only H.264 can be seleted for the video
encoding.
102
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable H.264+ or Enable H.265+ to enable this function. Enabling it
helps to ensure the high video quality with a lowered bitrate.





If the connected IP camera supports H.265 and H.265 is enabled, Enable H.265+ is shown
on the interface instead of Enable H.264+.
After enabling the H.264+ or H.265+, the Bitrate Type, Video Quality, Max. Bitrate Mode,
Max. Bitrate(Kbps) and Max. Bitrate Range Recommend are not configurable.
The H.264+ or H.265+ is not supported simultaneously with SVC.
For the connnected IP camera, the H.264+ or H.265+ should be supported by the camera
and added to the DVR with the HIKVISION protocol.
You should reboot the device to activate the new settings after enabling the H.264+ or
H.265+.
Step 4 Click More Settings to configure more parameters.
Figure 5-4 More Settings of Record Parameters
Pre-record: The time you set to record before the scheduled time or event. For example,
when an alarm triggered the recording at 10:00, if you set the pre-record time as 5
seconds, the camera records it at 9:59:55.
Post-record: The time you set to record after the event or the scheduled time. For
example, when an alarm triggered the recording ends at 11:00, if you set the post-record
time as 5 seconds, it records till 11:00:05.
Expired Time: The time for keeping the record files in the HDDs, once exceeded, the files
will be deleted. The files will be saved permanently if the value is set as 0. The actual
keeping time for the files should be determined by the capacity of the HDDs.
Redundant Record: Enabling redundant record means you save the record in the
redundant HDD. See Chapter 5.8 Configuring Redundant Recording.
Record Audio: Enable this feature to record the sound and disable it to record the video
without sound.
Video Stream: Main stream, Sub-stream and Dual-stream are selectable for recording.
When you select sub-stream, you can record for a longer time with the same storage
103
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
space.



The Redundant Record option is only available when the HDD mode is Group.
Redundant HDD is required for the redundant record function. For detailed information, see
Chapter 14.3.2 Setting HDD Property.
For network cameras, the parameters of Main Stream (Event) are not editable.
Step 5 Click Apply to save the settings.
Step 6 Optionally, you can click Copy to copy the settings to other analog channels if needed.


For -F series DVR, the analog signal inputs can be recognized automatically and mixed
randomly. So you can copy the same settings of the selected analog camera to any other
analog channel.
For other series, you can copy the same settings to the cameras with the same signal, e.g.,
the channel No. 1-3 connect to the Turbo HD cameras, and the channel No.4 connects to an
analog camera, and then the settings of channel No. 1 can be only copied to channel 2 and
3.
Figure 5-5 Copy Camera Settings
Step 7 Set encoding parameters for sub-stream.
1) Select the Sub-Stream tab.
Figure 5-6 Sub-Stream Encoding
2) Select a camera in the camera dropdown list.
104
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
3) Configure the parameters.
4) Click Apply to save the settings.
5) (Optional) If the parameters can also be used to other cameras, click Copy to copy the
settings to other channels.




For DS-7200/7300/7600/8100/9000HUHI series, when 3 MP signal input is connected, the
resolution of sub-stream does not support QVGA/QCIF. It will adjust to CIF automatically in
this condition.
For DS-7200/7300/7600/8100/9000HUHI series, when 3 MP signal input is connected, the
frame rate of sub-stream cannot exceed 15 fps.
For DS-7200HUHI-F/S series, when 5 MP/4 MP/3 MP signal input is connected, the frame
rate of the sub-stream cannot exceed the maximum frame rate of the main stream.
For HQHI-F/N series, when 3 MP signal input is connected, the frame rate of sub-stream
cannot exceed 12 fps.
Step 8 Set parameters for capture.
1) Select the Capture tab.
Figure 5-7 Capture Settings
2) Select a camera in the camera dropdown list.
3) Configure the parameters.
4) Click Apply to save the settings.
5) (Optional) If the parameters can also be used to other cameras, click Copy to copy the
settings to other channels.
The interval is the time period between two capturing actions. You can configure all the
parameters on this menu on your demand.
5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule
105
Digital Video Recorder User Manual


The DS-7100 models support continuous, motion and event triggered recording types.
Other models support continuous, alarm, motion, motion | alarm, motion & alarm, event
and POS triggered recording types.
In this chapter, we take the record schedule procedure as an example, and the same
procedure can be applied to configure schedule for both recording and capture. To schedule
the automatic capture, you need to choose the Capture tab in the Schedule interface.
Purpose
Set the record schedule, and then the camera will automatically start/stop recording according to
the configured schedule.
Step 1 Enter the Record Schedule interface.
Menu > Record/Capture > Schedule
Figure 5-8 Record Schedule
Different recording types are marked in different color icons.
Continuous: scheduled recording.
Event: recording triggered by all event triggered alarm.
Motion: recording triggered by motion detection.
Alarm: recording triggered by alarm.
M/A: recording triggered by either motion detection or alarm.
M&A: recording triggered by motion detection and alarm.
POS: recording triggered by POS and alarm.
106
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
The POS recording is supported by DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N
series DVR only.
Step 2 Choose the camera you want to configure in the Camera dropdown list.
Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable Schedule.
Step 4 Configure the record schedule.
Edit the schedule
1) Click Edit.
2) In the message box, you can choose the day to which you want to set schedule.
3) To schedule an all-day recording, check the checkbox after the All Day item.
Figure 5-9 Edit Schedule- All Day
4) To arrange other schedule, leave the All Day checkbox blank and set the Start/End time.
Figure 5-10 Edit Schedule- Set Time Period


Up to 8 periods can be configured for each day. And the time periods cannot be overlapped
with each other.
To enable Event, Motion, Alarm, M | A (motion or alarm), M & A (motion and alarm) and
POS triggered recording, you must configure the motion detection settings, alarm input
settings or VCA settings as well. For detailed information, refer to Chapter 8.1, Chapter 8.7
and Chapter 9.
5) Repeat the above steps 1)-4) to schedule recording for other days in the week. If the
schedule can also be set to other days, click Copy.
107
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-11 Copy Schedule to Other Days
The Holiday option is available when you enable holiday schedule in Holiday settings. See Chapter
5.7 Configuring Holiday Record.
6) Click OK to save setting and back to upper level menu.
Draw the schedule
1) Click on the color icon to select a record type in the event list on the right-side of the
interface.
Figure 5-12 Draw the Recording Schedule
108
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-13 Draw the Capture Schedule
2) Click and drag the mouse on the schedule.
3) Click on the other area except for the schedule table to finish and exit from the drawing.
You can repeat step 4 to set schedule for other channels. If the settings can also be used to
other channels, click Copy, and then choose the channel to which you want to copy to.
Step 5 Click Apply in the Record Schedule interface to save the settings.
5.3 Configuring Motion Detection Recording and Capture
Purpose
Follow the steps to set the motion detection parameters. In the live view mode, once a motion
detection event takes place, the DVR can analyze it and do many actions to handle it. Enabling
motion detection function can trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen
monitoring, audio warning, notifying the surveillance center, sending email and so on.
Step 1 Enter the Motion Detection interface.
Menu>Camera>Motion
109
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-14 Motion Detection
Step 2 Configure Motion Detection:
1) Choose camera you want to configure.
2) Check the checkbox after Enable Motion Detection.
3) Drag and draw the area for motion detection by mouse. If you want to set the motion
detection for all the area shot by the camera, click Full Screen. To clear the motion
detection area, click Clear.
Figure 5-15 Motion Detection- Mask
4) Click
, and the message box for channel information pops up.
Figure 5-16 Motion Detection Settings
5) Select the channels which you want the motion detection event to trigger recording.
6) Click Apply to save the settings.
7) Click OK to back to the upper level menu.
8) Exit the Motion Detection menu.
110
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 3 Configure the schedule.
Please refer to the step 4 of Chapter 5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule, while
you may choose Motion as the record type.
5.4 Configuring Alarm Triggered Recording and Capture
Purpose
Follow the procedure to configure alarm triggered recording or capture.
Step 1 Enter the Alarm Setting interface.
Menu > Configuration > Alarm
Figure 5-17 Alarm Settings
Step 2 Click Alarm Input tab.
Figure 5-18 Alarm Settings- Alarm Input
Step 3 Select Alarm Input No.
Step 4 Input Alarm Name.
Step 5 Select N.O (normally open) or N.C (normally closed) for alarm type.
Step 6 Check the checkbox of Enable to enable alarm.
111
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-19 Enable Alarm
Step 7 Click the
button after Settings to set the triggered channels, arming schedule, linkage
actions and PTZ linking. Refer to step 4 of Chapter 5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture
Schedule for detailed operations.
Figure 5-20 Alarm Handling
Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.
Repeat the steps from 1 to 8 to configure other alarm input parameters.
If the settings can also be applied to other alarm inputs, click Copy and choose the alarm
input number.
Figure 5-21 Copy Alarm Input
5.5 Configuring Event Recording and Capture
Purpose
The event triggered recording can be configured through the menu. Then events include the
motion detection, alarm and VCA events (face detection/face capture, line crossing detection,
112
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
intrusion detection, region entrance detection, region exiting detection, loitering detection, people
gathering detection, fast moving detection, parking detection, unattended baggage detection,
object removal detection, audio loss exception detection, sudden change of sound intensity
detection, and defocus detection).





The DS-7100 series DVR do not support the VCA alarm.
DS-7200/7300/8100/9000HUHI series DVR support VCA (line crossing detection and
intrusion detection) of all channels. DS-7600HUHI-F/N series DVR support 2-ch VCA (line
crossing detection and intrusion detection). Channels with audio support audio exception
detection.
HQHI series DVR excluding 7100 series support 2-ch VCA (line crossing detection and
intrusion detection). Channels with audio support audio exception detection.
Other models support 1-ch VCA (line crossing detection and intrusion detection). Channels
with audio support audio exception detection.
For the analog channels, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with
other VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection and vehicle
detection and heat map or people counting functions. You can only enable one function.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface and select a camera for the VCA settings.
Menu > Camera > VCA
Figure 5-22 VCA Settings
Step 2 Configure the detection rules for VCA events. For details, see the step 6 in Chapter 10.3 Line
Crossing Detection.
Step 3 Click the icon
to configure the alarm linkage actions for the VCA events.
Select Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels which will start to record when
VCA alarm is triggered.
Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.
113
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-23 Set Triggered Camera of VCA Alarm
Step 5 Enter Record Schedule Settings interface (Menu> Record> Schedule>Record Schedule), and
then set Event as the record type. For details, see step 2 in Chapter 5.2 Configuring
Recording and Capture Schedule.
5.6 Configuring Manual Recording and Continous Capture
Purpose
Follow the steps to set parameters for the manual recording and continuous capture. Using manual
recording and continuous capture, you need to manually cancel the record and capture. The
manual recording and manual continuous capture is prior to the scheduled recording and capture.
Step 1 Enter the Manual Record interface.
Menu > Manual
Figure 5-24 Manual Record
Step 2 Enable manual record.
Click the status icon
Or click the status icon
before camera number to change it to
.
of Analog to enable manual record of all channels.
Step 3 Disable manual record.
114
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Click the status icon
Or click the status icon
to change it to
.
of Analog to disable manual record of all channels.
After rebooting all the manual records enabled are canceled.
5.7 Configuring Holiday Recording and Capture
Purpose
Follow the steps to configure the record or capture schedule on holiday for that year. You may
want to have different plan for recording on holiday.
Step 1 Enter the Record setting interface.
Menu > Record
Step 2 Choose Holiday on the left bar.
Figure 5-25 Holiday Settings
Step 3 Enable Edit Holiday schedule.
1) Click
to enter the Edit interface.
115
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-26 Edit Holiday Settings
2) Check the checkbox of Enable.
3) Select Mode from the dropdown list.
There are three different modes for the date format to configure holiday schedule. By
Month, By Week, and By Date are selectable.
4) Set the start and end date.
5) Click Apply to save settings.
6) Click OK to exit the Edit interface.
Step 4 Configure the record schedule.
Please refer to the Chapter 5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule, while you may
choose Holiday in the Schedule dropdown list, or you can draw the schedule on the
timeline of Holiday.
Figure 5-27 Edit Schedule- Holiday
116
Digital Video Recorder User Manual



Up to 8 periods can be configured for each day. And the time periods cannot be overlapped
each other.
In the time table of the channel, both holiday schedule and normal day schedule are
displayed.
Repeat the above step 4 to set Holiday schedule for other channels. If the holiday schedule
can also be used to other channels, click Copy and choose the channel you want to apply
the settings.
5.8 Configuring Redundant Recording and Capture
Purpose
Enabling redundant recording and capture, which means saving the record files and captured
pictures not only in the R/W HDD but also in the redundant HDD, will effectively enhance the data
safety and reliability.
Before you start
You must set the Storage mode in the HDD advanced settings to Group before you set the HDD
property to Redundant. For detailed information, please refer to Chapter 14.3 Managing HDD
Group. There should be at least another HDD which is in Read/Write status.
Step 1 Enter HDD Information interface.
Menu> HDD
Figure 5-28 HDD General
Step 2 Select the HDD and click
to enter the Local HDD Settings interface.
1) Set the HDD property to Redundant.
Figure 5-29 HDD General-Editing
117
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
2) Click Apply to save the settings.
3) Click OK to back to the upper level menu.
Step 3 Enter the Record setting interface.
Menu> Record> Parameters
1) Select the Record tab.
2) Select Camera you want to configure.
3) Click More Settings button.
Figure 5-30 More Settings
4) Check the checkbox of Redundant Record.
5) Click OK to save the settings.
6) If the encoding parameters can also be used to other channels, click Copy and choose the
channel you want to apply the settings.
5.9 Configuring HDD Group
Purpose
You can group the HDDs and save the record files in certain HDD group.
Step 1 Enter HDD setting interface.
Menu>HDD>Advanced
Step 2 Select Storage Mode tab.
Check whether the storage mode of the HDD is Group. If not, set it to Group. For detailed
information, please refer to Chapter 14.3 Managing HDD Group.
Step 3 Select General in the left bar.
Click
to enter editing interface.
118
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 4 Configuring HDD group.
1) Choose a group number for the HDD group.
2) Click Apply to save your settings.
3) Click OK to back to the upper level menu.
Step 5 Repeat the above steps to configure more HDD groups.
Step 6 Choose the Channels which you want to save the record files in the HDD group.
1) Enter Storage Mode interface.
Menu>HDD>Advanced> Storage Mode
Figure 5-31 HDD Advanced
2) Choose Group number in the dropdown list of Record on HDD Group
3) Check the channels you want to save in this group.
4) Click Apply to save settings.
After you have configured the HDD groups, you can configure the recording settings following the
procedure provided in Chapter 5.2-5.7.
5.10 Files Protection
Purpose
You can lock the recorded files or set the HDD property to Read-only to protect the record files
from being overwritten.
Protect file by locking the record files
Step 1 Enter Export Settings interface.
Menu> Export
119
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-32 Export
Step 2 Select the channels you want to investigate by checking the checkbox to
.
Step 3 Configure the record mode, record type, file type, start time and end time.
Step 4 Click Search to show the results.
Figure 5-33 Export-Search Result
Step 5 Protect the record files.
1) Find the record files you want to protect, and then click the
indicating that the file is locked.
icon which will turn to
The record files of which the recording is still not completed cannot be locked.
2) Click
to change it to
to unlock the file and the file is not protected.
Protect file by setting HDD property to Read-only
Before you start
120
,
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
To edit HDD property, you need to set the storage mode of the HDD to Group. See Chapter 14.3
Managing HDD Group.
Step 1 Enter HDD setting interface.
Menu> HDD
Figure 5-34 HDD General
Step 2 Click
to edit the HDD you want to protect.
Figure 5-35 HDD General- Editing
Step 3 Set the HDD to Read-only.
Step 4 Click OK to save settings and back to the upper level menu.



You cannot save any files in a Read-only HDD. If you want to save files in the HDD, change
the property to R/W.
If there is only one HDD and is set to Read-only, the DVR cannot record any files. Only live
view mode is available.
If you set the HDD to Read-only when the DVR is saving files in it, then the file will be saved
in next R/W HDD. If there is only one HDD, the recording will be stopped.
5.11 One-Key Enabling and Disabling H.264+ for Analog
Cameras
Purpose
For -F series DVR, you can one-key enable or disable H.264+ for the analog cameras.
Task 1: One-Key Enabling H.264+ for All Analog Cameras
121
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 1 Enter the Record menu
Menu > Record
Step 2 Click Advanced to enter the Advanced Settings interface.
Figure 5-36 Advanced Settings (for HQHI and HGHI-F series DVR)
Figure 5-37 Advanced Settings (for HUHI series DVR)
Step 3 Click Enable to enable H.264+ for all the analog cameras and the following attention box
pops up.
Figure 5-38 Attention Box
Step 4 Click Yes to enable the function and reboot the device to have new settings taken effect.
If H.264+ is already enabled for all the analog cameras, when you click Enable button, the following
attention box pops up to remind you that H.264+ is already enabled for all analog cameras.
Figure 5-39 Attention Box
Task 2: One-Key Disabling H.264+ for All Analog Cameras
Step 1 Enter the Record menu
Menu > Record
Step 2 Click Advanced to enter the advanced interface.
122
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-40 Advanced Settings (for HQHI and HGHI-F series DVR)
Figure 5-41 Advanced Settings (for HUHI series DVR)
Step 3 Click Disable to disable H.264+ for all the analog cameras and the following attention box
pops up.
Figure 5-42 Attention Box
Step 4 Click Yes to enable the function and reboot the device to have new settings taken effect.
If H.264+ is already disabled for all the analog cameras, when you click Disable button, the
following attention box pops up to remind you that H.264+ is already disabled for all analog
cameras.
Figure 5-43 Attention Box
5.12 Configuring 1080P Lite
Purpose
When the 1080P Lite Mode is enabled, the encoding resolution at 1080P Lite (real-time) is
supported. If not, up to 1080P (non-real-time) is supported.
This chapter is appplicable to HQHI and HGHI-F series DVR.

For HQHI series DVR:
Task1: Enabling the 1080P Lite Mode
123
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 1 Enter the Record menu
Menu > Record
Step 2 Click Advanced to enter the advanced interface.
Figure 5-44 Advanced Interface (for DS-7100/7200HQHI-F/N)
Figure 5-45 Advanced Interface (for DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N)
Step 3 Check the checkbox of 1080P Lite Mode and click Apply to pop up the attention box. After
enabling 1080p lite mode, the 3 MP signal is not accessible to analog channel.
Figure 5-46 Attention
Step 4 Click Yes to reboot the device to have new settings taken effect.
Task2: Disabling the 1080P Lite Mode
Step 1 Enter the Record menu
Menu > Record
Step 2 Click Advanced to enter the advanced interface.
Step 3 Uncheck the checkbox of 1080P Lite Mode and click Apply. The following attention box
pops up:
Figure 5-47 Attention
124
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 4 Click Yes to reboot the device to activate the new settings or No to restore the old settings.

For HGHI-F series DVR:
Task1: Enabling the 1080P Lite Mode
Step 1 Enter the Record menu
Menu > Record
Step 2 Click Advanced to enter the advanced interface.
Figure 5-48 Advanced Interface (for HGHI-F Series DVR)
Step 3 Check the checkbox of 1080P Lite Mode and click Apply to pop up the attention box.
Enabling 1080p lite will switch to real-time mode.
Figure 5-49 Enable 1080P Lite
Step 4 Click Yes to reboot the device to enable 1080p lite mode and the encoding mode will
change to real-time mode.
Task2: Disabling the 1080P Lite Mode
Step 1 Enter the General Configuration interface.
Menu > Configuration > General
Step 2 Click More Settings to enter the More Settings interface.
Figure 5-50 More Settings
Step 3 Select the Encoding Mode to Non-Real-Time Mode.
Step 4 Click Apply to pop up the attention box. Enabling non-real-time encoding will disable 1080p
lite mode.
125
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 5-51 Disable 1080P Lite
Step 5 Click Yes to reboot the device to disable 1080p lite mode.
126
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 6 Playback
6.1
Playing Back Record Files
6.1.1 Instant Playback
Purpose
Play back the recorded video files of a specific channel in the live view mode. Channel switch is
supported.
Instant playback by channel
Choose a channel in live view mode and click the
button in the quick setting toolbar.
In the instant playback mode, only record files recorded during the last five minutes on this
channel will be played back.
Figure 6-1 Instant Playback Interface
6.1.2 Playing Back by Normal Search
Playback by Channel
Enter the Playback interface.
Right click a channel in live view mode and select Playback from the menu, as shown in the
following figure:
127
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-2 Right-click Menu under Live View
Playback by Time
Purpose
Play back video files recorded in specified time duration. Multi-channel simultaneous playback and
channel switch are supported.
Step 1 Enter Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
Step 2 Check the checkbox of channel(s) in the channel list and then double-click to select a date
on the calendar.
Figure 6-3 Playback Calendar
128
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
If there are record files for that camera in that day, in the calendar, the icon for that day is
displayed as . Otherwise it is displayed as .
Playback Interface
You can select the main stream or sub-stream from the dropdown list for playback.
You can also use the toolbar in the bottom part of Playback interface to control playing progress,
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-4 Playback Interface
Select the channel(s) if you want to switch playback to another channel or execute simultaneous
playback of multiple channels.
Figure 6-5 Toolbar of Playback
Table 6-1 Detailed Explanation of Playback Toolbar
Button
/
Operation
Audio
on/Mute
Add default
tag
Button
/
Operation
Button Operation
Start/Stop
clipping
Lock File
Add
customized tag
File
management
for video clips,
locked files and
tags
129
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Button
/
Operation
Button
Operation
Button Operation
Reverse
play/Pause
Stop
30s forward
30s reverse
Fast forward
Previous day
Slow forward
Full Screen
Exit
Next day
Save the clips
Process bar
Digital Zoom
/
/
Pause/Play
Scaling
up/down
time line
the
Enable/
Disable POS
information
overlay
This enable/disable POS overlay function is supported by DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and
DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR only. When the POS is enabled when playing back, the
POS information will be overlain on the video. And the keyword searching is supported.



The
indicates the start time and end time of the record
files.
represents normal recording (manual or schedule);
represents event recording
(motion, alarm, motion | alarm, motion & alarm).
Playback progress bar: use the mouse to click any point of the progress bar to locate special
frames.
6.1.3 Playing Back by Event Search
Purpose
Play back record files on one or several channels searched out by restricting event type (motion
detection, alarm input or VCA). Channel switch is supported.
Step 1 Enter the Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
130
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 2 Click
and select
to enter the Event Playback interface.
Step 3 Select Alarm Input, Motion, VCA as the event type, and specify the start time and end time
for search.
Figure 6-6 Video Search by Motion Detection
Step 4 Click Search, and the record files matching the search conditions will be displayed on a list.
Step 5 Select and click
button to play back the record files.
You can click Back button to return to the search interface.
If there is only one channel triggered, clicking
interface of this channel.
button takes you to Full-screen Playback
If several channels are triggered, clicking
button takes you to the Synchronous
Playback interface. Check
checkbox to select one channel for playback or select
multiple channels for synchronous playback.
The maximum number of channels for synchronous playback supported varies to different models.
Figure 6-7 Select Channels for Synchronous Playback
131
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 6 On the Event Playback interface, you can select the main stream or sub-stream from the
dropdown list for playback.
The toolbar in the bottom part of Playback interface can be used to control playing process.
Figure 6-8 Interface of Playback by Event
Pre-play and post-play can be configured for the playback of event triggered record files.
Pre-play: The time you set to play back before the event. For example, when an alarm triggered
the recording at 10:00, if you set the pre-play time as 5 seconds, the video plays back from 9:59:55.
Post-play: The time you set to play back after the event. For example, when an alarm triggered the
recording ends at 11:00, if you set the post-play time as 5 seconds, the video plays back till
11:00:05.
Step 7 You can click
or
button to select the previous or next event. Please refer to Table
6-1 for the description of buttons on the toolbar.
6.1.4 Playing Back by Tag
Purpose
Video tag allows you to record related information like people and location of a certain time point
during playback. You are also allowed to use video tag(s) to search for record files and position
time point.
Before playing back by tag
Step 1 Enter Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
Step 2 Search and play back the record file(s). Refer to Chapter 6.1.2 Playing Back by Normal
Search for the detailed information about searching and playback of the record files.
132
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-9 Interface of Playback by Time
Click
button to add default tag.
Click
button to add customized tag and input tag name.
Figure 6-10 Add Tag
Max. 64 tags can be added to a single video file.
Step 3 Tag management.
Click
button to check, edit and delete tag(s).
133
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-11 Tag Management Interface
Steps
Step 1 Select Tag from the drop-down list in the Playback interface.
Step 2 Choose channels, edit start time and end time, and then click Search to enter Search Result
interface.
You can enter keyword in the textbox
to search the tag on your command.
Figure 6-12 Video Search by Tag
Step 3 Click
button to play back the file.
You can click the Back button to return to the search interface.
134
Digital Video Recorder User Manual


Pre-play and post-play can be configured.
You can click
or
button to select the previous or next tag. Please refer to Table 6-1
for the description of buttons on the toolbar.
6.1.5 Playing Back by Smart Search
Purpose
The smart playback function provides an easy way to get through the less effective information.
When you select the smart playback mode, the system will analyze the video containing the
motion or VCA information, mark it with green color and play it in the normal speed while the
video without motion will be played in the 16-time speed. The smart playback rules and areas are
configurable.
Before you start
To get the smart search result, the corresponding event type must be enabled and configured on
the IP camera. Here we take the intrusion detection as an example.
Step 1 Log in the IP camera by the web browser, and enable the intrusion detection by checking
the checkbox of it. You may enter the motion detection configuration interface by
Configuration > Advanced Configuration > Events > Intrusion Detection.
Figure 6-13 Setting Intrusion Detection on IP Camera
Step 2 Configure the required parameters of intrusion detection, including area, arming schedule
and linkage methods. Refer to the user manual of smart IP camera for detailed instructions.
Steps
Step 1 Enter the Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
Step 2 Select the Smart in the drop-down list on the top-left side.
Step 3 Select a camera in the camera list.
135
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-14 Smart Playback Interface
Step 4 Select a date in the calendar and click the
button to play.
Refer to Table 6-2 for the descriptions of the buttons on the Smart Playback Toolbar.
Table 6-2 Detailed Explanation of Smart Playback Toolbar
Button
/
Operation
Button
Operation
Button
Operation
Draw line for the
line crossing
detection
Draw quadrilateral
for the intrusion
detection
Set full screen for
motion detection
Clear all
/
Start/Stop
clipping
File management
for video clips
Stop playing
/
Pause playing
/Play
Smart settings
Search matched
video files
Show/Hide VCA
information
136
Draw rectangle
for the intrusion
detection
Filter video files
by setting the
target characters
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 5 Set the rules and areas for smart search of VCA event or motion event.

Line Crossing Detection
Select the
line.

button , and click on the image to specify the start point and end point of the
Intrusion Detection
Click the
button, and specify 4 points to set a quadrilateral region for intrusion detection.
Only one region can be set.

Motion Detection
Click the
button and then click and draw the mouse to set the detection area manually.
You can also click the
button to set the full screen as the detection area.
Step 6 Click
to configure the smart settings.
Figure 6-15 Smart Settings
Skip the Non-Related Video: The non-related video will not be played if this function is
enabled.
Play Non-Related Video at: Set the speed to play the non-related video. Max. 8/4/2/1 are
selectable.
Play Related Video at: Set the speed to play the related video. Max. 8/4/2/1 are selectable.
Pre-play and post-play is not available for the motion event type.
Step 7 Click
to search and play the matched video files.
Step 8 (Optional) Click
to filter the searched video files by setting the target characters,
including the gender and age of the human and whether he/she wears glasses.
137
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-16 Set Result Filter
The Result Filter function is supported by the IP camera only.
Step 9 (Optional) For the cameras supporting VCA, click
to show the VCA information.
Then the configured line or quadrilateral in VCA configuration and target frame(s) will be
shown on the playback interface. Click
to hide the VCA information.
Figure 6-17 Show VCA Information



In smart playback, both the analog and IP cameras support VCA information overlay.
If the connected camera does not support VCA, the icon is grey and unavailable.
For the analog cameras, the VCA information includes line crossing detection and intrusion
detection. For the IP cameras, the VCA information includes all the VCA detections of smart
IP camera.
138
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
6.1.6 Playing Back by System Logs
Purpose
Play back record file(s) associated with channels after searching system logs.
Step 1 Enter Log Information interface.
Menu>Maintenance>Log Information
Figure 6-18 System Log Search Interface
Step 2 Click Log Search tab to enter System Log Search interface.
Set search time and type and click Search button.
Figure 6-19 Result of System Log Search
Step 3 Choose a log with record file and click
button to enter Playback interface.
139
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
If there is no record file at the time point of the log, the message box “No result found” will pop
up.
Step 4 Playback management.
The toolbar in the bottom part of Playback interface can be used to control playing process.
Figure 6-20 Interface of Playback by Log
6.1.7 Playing Back by Sub-Periods
Purpose
The video files can be played in multiple sub-periods simultaneously on the screens.
Step 1 Enter Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
Step 2 Select Sub-periods from the drop-down list in the upper-left corner of the page to enter
the Sub-periods Playback interface.
Step 3 Select a date and start playing the video file.
Step 4 Select the Split-screen Number from the dropdown list. Up to 16 screens are configurable.
140
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-21 Interface of Sub-periods Playback
According to the defined number of split-screens, the video files on the selected date can be
divided into average segments for playback. E.g., if there are video files existing between 16:00 and
22:00, and the 6-screen display mode is selected, then it can play the video files for 1 hour on each
screen simultaneously.
6.1.8 Playing Back External File
Purpose
Perform the following steps to look up and play back files in the external devices.
Step 1 Enter the Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
Step 2 Select the External File in the drop-down list on the top-left side.
The files are listed in the right-side list.
You can click the
Step 3 Select and click the
button to refresh the file list.
button to play back it.
141
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-22 Interface of External File Playback
6.1.9 Playing Back Pictures
The playback by picture is supported by the DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR only.
Purpose
The captured pictures stored in the HDDs of the device can be searched and viewed.
Step 2 Enter Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
Step 3 Select Picture from the drop-down list in the upper-left corner of the page to enter the
Picture Playback interface.
Step 4 Check
search.
checkbox to select the channel(s) and specify the start time and end time for
Step 5 Click Search to enter Search Result interface.
Up to 4000 pictures can be displayed each time.
Step 6 Choose a picture you want to view and click
button.
You can click Back to return to the search interface.
142
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-23 Result of Picture Playback
Step 7 The toolbar in the bottom part of Playback interface can be used to control playing process.
Figure 6-24 Picture Playback Toolbar
Table 6-3 Detailed Explanation of Picture-playback Toolbar
Button
Function
Play reverse
6.2
Button
Function
Button
Function
Previous
picture
Play
Button
Function
Next picture
Auxiliary Functions of Playback
6.2.1 Playing Back Frame by Frame
Purpose
Play video files frame by frame, in order to check image details of the video when abnormal events
happen.
Step 1 Go to Playback interface and click button
until the speed changes to Single frame.
Step 2 One click on the playback screen represents playback or adverse playback of one frame.
You can use button
in toolbar to stop the playing.
143
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
6.2.2 Digital Zoom
Step 1 Click the
button on the playback control bar to enter Digital Zoom interface.
Step 2 Use the mouse to draw a red rectangle and the image within it will be enlarged up to 16
times.
Figure 6-25 Draw Area for Digital Zoom
Step 3 Right-click the image to exit the digital zoom interface.
6.2.3 Reverse Playback of Multi-Channel
Purpose
You can play back record files of multi-channel reversely. Up to 16-ch simultaneous reverse
playback is supported.
Step 1 Enter Playback interface.
Menu>Playback
Step 2 Check more than one checkboxes to select multiple channels and click to select a date on
the calendar.
144
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 6-26 4-ch Synchronous Playback Interface
Step 3 Click
to play back the record files reversely.
145
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 7 Backup
7.1
Backing up Record Files
Before you start
Please insert the backup device(s) into the device.
7.1.1 Backing up by Normal Video/Picture Search
Purpose
The record files or pictures can be backed up to various devices, such as USB devices (USB flash
drives, USB HDDs, USB writer), SATA writer and e-SATA HDD.
Backup using USB flash drives and USB HDDs
Step 1 Enter Export interface.
Menu>Export>Normal/Picture
Step 2 Select the cameras to search.
Step 3 Set search condition and click Search button to enter the search result interface.
The POS record type is supported by DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N
series DVR only.
Figure 7-1 Normal Video Search for Backup
146
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 4 The matched video files are displayed in Chart or List display mode.
Click
to play the record file if you want to check it.
Check the checkbox before the video files you want to back up.
The size of the currently selected files is displayed in the lower-left corner of the window.
Figure 7-2 Result of Normal Video Search for Backup
Step 5 Select video files from the Chart or List to export, and click the button Export to enter the
Export interface.
You can also click Export All to select all the video files for backup and enter the Export
interface.
Figure 7-3 Export by Normal Video Search using USB Flash Drive
Step 6 Select the backup device from the drop-down list and you can also select the file format to
filter the files existing in the backup device.
147
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 7 Select the saving type.
Step 8 Click the button Export on the Export interface to start the backup process. On the pop-up
message box, select to export the video files or the player to the backup device. Click OK to
confirm.
Figure 7-4 Select File or Player for Backup
Step 9 A prompt message will pop up after the backup process is complete. Click OK to confirm.
Figure 7-5 Export Finished
The backup of pictures using USB writer or SATA writer has the same operating instructions. Please
refer to steps described above.
7.1.2 Backing up by Event Search
Purpose
Back up event-related record files using USB devices (USB flash drives, USB HDDs, USB writer),
SATA writer or eSATA HDD. Quick Backup and Normal Backup are supported.
Step 1 Enter Export interface.
Menu > Export > Event
Step 2 Select the cameras to search.
Step 3 Select the event type to alarm input, motion, VCA or POS (for DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and
DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR only).
148
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 7-6 Event Search for Backup
Step 4 Set search condition and click Search button to enter the search result interface. The
matched video files are displayed in Chart or List display mode.
Step 5 Select video files from the Chart or List interface to export.
Figure 7-7 Result of Event Search
Step 6 Export the video files. Please refer to step5 of Chapter 7.1.1 Backing up by Normal
Video/Picture Search for details.
7.1.3 Backing up Video Clips
Purpose
You may also select video clips in playback mode to export directly during Playback, using USB
devices (USB flash drives, USB HDDs, USB writer), or SATA writer.
Step 1 Enter Playback interface.
149
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 2 During playback, use buttons
record file(s).
Step 3 Click
or
in the playback toolbar to start or stop clipping
to enter the file management interface.
Figure 7-8 Video Clips Export Interface
Step 4 Export the video clips in playback. Please refer to step5 of Chapter 7.1.1 Backing up by
Normal Video/Picture Search for details.
7.2
Managing Backup Devices
Management of USB flash drives, USB HDDs and eSATA HDDs
Step 1 Enter the Export interface.
Figure 7-9 Storage Device Management
Step 2 Backup device management.
Click New Folder button if you want to create a new folder in the backup device.
150
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Select a record file or folder in the backup device and click
it.
button if you want to delete
Click Erase button if you want to erase the files from a re-writable CD/DVD.
Click Format button to format the backup device.
If the inserted storage device is not recognized:
 Click the Refresh button.
 Reconnect device.
 Check for compatibility from vendor.
151
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 8 Alarm Settings
8.1
Setting Motion Detection
Step 1 Enter Motion Detection interface of Camera Management and choose a camera you want
to set up motion detection.
Menu> Camera> Motion
Figure 8-1 Motion Detection Setup Interface
Step 2 Set detection area and sensitivity.
Check
checkbox to enable motion detection. Use the mouse to draw detection area(s)
or click Full Screen to set the detection area to be the full screen and drag the sensitivity
bar to set sensitivity.
Click
to set alarm response actions.
Figure 8-2 Set Detection Area and Sensitivity
152
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 3 Click Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels which will start to record or
become full-screen monitoring when motion alarm is triggered.
Figure 8-3 Set Trigger Camera of Motion Detection
Step 4 Set arming schedule of the channel.
Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel’s arming schedule.
Choose one day of a week and up to eight time periods can be set within each day. Or you
can click the Copy button to copy the time period settings to other day(s).
Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.
Figure 8-4 Set Arming Schedule of Motion Detection
Step 5 Click Linkage Action tab to set up alarm response actions of motion alarm (please refer to
Chapter 8.7 Setting Alarm Response Actions).
Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of a week.
Click the OK button to complete the motion detection settings of the channel.
Step 6 If you want to set motion detection for another channel, repeat the above steps or just
copy the above settings to it.
You are not allowed to copy the “Trigger Channel” action.
153
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
8.2
Setting Sensor Alarms
Purpose
Set up handling method of an external sensor alarm.
Step 1 Enter Alarm Input Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Alarm > Alarm Input
Figure 8-5 Alarm Input Settings Interface
Step 2 Set the handling method of the selected alarm input.
Check the Enable checkbox and click
button to set its alarm response actions.
Figure 8-6 Set Arming Schedule of Alarm Input
Step 3 Select Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels which will start to record or
become full-screen monitoring when an external alarm input is triggered.
Step 4 Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel’s arming schedule.
Select one day of a week and maximum eight time periods can be set within each day.
154
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.
Step 5 Select Linkage Action tab to set up alarm response actions of the alarm input (Refer to
Chapter 8.7 Setting Alarm Response Actions).
Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use
Copy button to copy an arming schedule to other days.
Step 6 (Optional) Select PTZ Linking tab and set PTZ linkage of the alarm input.
Set PTZ linking parameters and click the OK button to complete the settings of the alarm
input.
Check whether the PTZ or speed dome supports PTZ linkage.
One alarm input can trigger presets, patrol or pattern of more than one channel. But presets,
patrols and patterns are exclusive.
Figure 8-7 Set PTZ Linking of Alarm Input
Step 7 If you want to set handling action of another alarm input, repeat the above steps or just
copy the above settings to it.
155
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 8-8 Copy Settings of Alarm Input
Step 8 (Optional) Enable the one-key disarming for local alarm input 1 (Local<-1).
1) Check the checkbox of Enable One-Key Disarming.
2) Click the Settings button to enter the linkage action settings interface.
3) Select the alarm linkage action (s) you want to disarm for the local alarm input 1. The
selected linkage actions include the Full Screen Monitoring, Audible Warning, Notify
Surveillance Center, Send Email, Upload Captured Pictures to Cloud and Trigger Alarm
Output.
Figure 8-9 Disarm Linkage Actions
When the alarm input 1 (Local<-1) is enabled with one-key disarming, the other alarm input
settings are not configurable.
8.3
Detecting Video Loss
Purpose
156
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Detect video loss of a channel and take alarm response action(s).
Step 1 Enter Video Loss interface of Camera Management and select a channel you want to
detect.
Menu> Camera> Video Loss
Figure 8-10 Video Loss Setup Interface
Step 2 Set up handling method of video loss.
Check the checkbox of Enable Video Loss Alarm.
Click
button to set up handling method of video loss.
Step 3 Set arming schedule of the channel.
Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel’s arming schedule.
Choose one day of a week and up to eight time periods can be set within each day. Or you
can click the Copy button to copy the time period settings to other day(s).
Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.
Figure 8-11 Set Arming Schedule of Video Loss
157
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use
Copy button to copy an arming schedule to other days.
Step 4 Select Linkage Action tab to set up alarm response action of video loss (please refer to
Chapter 8.7 Setting Alarm Response Actions).
Step 5 Click the OK button to complete the video loss settings of the channel.
Repeat the above steps to finish settings of other channels, or click the Copy button copy
the above settings to them.
8.4
Detecting Video Tampering
Purpose
Trigger alarm when the lens is covered and take alarm response action(s).
Step 1 Enter Video Tampering interface of Camera Management and select a channel you want to
detect video tampering.
Menu> Camera> Video Tampering Detection
Figure 8-12 Video Tampering Interface
Step 2 Check the checkbox of Enable Video Tampering Detection.
Step 3 Drag the sensitivity bar and choose a proper sensitivity level.
Step 4 Click
to set handling method of video tampering. Set arming schedule and alarm
response actions of the channel.
1) Click Arming Schedule tab to set the arming schedule of response action.
2) Select one day of a week and up to eight time periods can be set within each day.
Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.
158
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 8-13 Set Arming Schedule of Video Tampering
3) Select Linkage Action tab to set alarm response actions of video tampering alarm (please
refer to Chapter 8.7 Setting Alarm Response Actions).
Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use
Copy button to copy an arming schedule to other days.
4) Click the OK button to complete the video tampering settings of the channel.
Repeat the above steps to finish settings of other channels, or click the Copy button copy
the above settings to them.
Step 5 Click the Apply button to save and activate the settings.
8.5
Setting All-day Video Quality Diagnostics
Purpose
The device provides two ways to diagnose the video quality: manual and all-day. Perform the
following steps to set the threshold of the diagnosing and the linkage actions.
Step 1 Enter Video Quality Diagnostics Settings interface of Camera Management and select a
channel you want to detect video tampering.
Menu> Camera> Video Quality Diagnostics
159
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 8-14 Video Quality Diagnostics Interface
Step 2 Check the checkbox of Enable Video Quality Diagnostics.
To enable video quality diagnostics, the function should be supported by the selected camera.
Step 3 Enable and set the threshold of the diagnostic types, there are Blurred Image, Abnormal
Brightness, and Color Cast.
Check the corresponding checkbox of the diagnostic type, and adjust the threshold of it by
dragging the bar.
The higher the threshold you set, the harder the exception will be detected.
Step 4 Click
to set handling method of video quality diagnostics. Set arming schedule and
alarm response actions of the channel.
1) Click Arming Schedule tab to set the arming schedule of response action.
2) Choose one day of a week and up to eight time periods can be set within each day.
Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.
160
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 8-15 Set Arming Schedule of Video Quality Diagnostics
3) Select Linkage Action tab to set alarm response actions of video quality diagnostics alarm
(please refer to Chapter 8.7 Setting Alarm Response Actions).
Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also use
Copy button to copy an arming schedule to other days.
4) Click the OK button to complete the video quality diagnostics settings of the channel.
Step 5 Click the Apply button to save and activate settings.
Step 6 (Optional) you can copy the same settings to other cameras by clicking the Copy button.
8.6
Handling Exceptions
Purpose
Exception settings refer to the handling method of various exceptions, e.g.

HDD Full: The HDD is full.

HDD Error: Writing HDD error, unformatted HDD, etc.

Network Disconnected: Disconnected network cable.

IP Conflicted: Duplicated IP address.

Illegal Login: Incorrect user ID or password.

Input/Recording Resolution Mismatch: The input resolution is smaller than the recording
resolution.

Record/Capture Exception: No space for saving recorded files or captured pictures.
Step 1 Enter Exceptions interface and handle various exceptions.
Menu> Configuration> Exceptions
161
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 8-16 Exception Settings Interface
Step 2 Check the checkbox of Enable Event Hint to display the
(Event/Exception icon) when
an exceptional event occurs. And click the icon
to select the detailed event hint for
display.
Figure 8-17 Event Hint Settings
Click the icon
appears in the live view interface, and you can view the detailed information of
the exceptional event. Click the button Set, and then you can select the detailed event hint for
display.
162
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 8-18 Detailed Event
Step 3 Set the alarm linkage actions. For details, see Chapter 8.7 Setting Alarm Response Actions.
Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.
8.7
Setting Alarm Response Actions
Purpose
Alarm response actions will be activated when an alarm or exception occurs, including Full Screen
Monitoring, Audible Warning (buzzer), Notify Surveillance Center, Send Email and Trigger Alarm
Output.
Full Screen Monitoring
When an alarm is triggered, the local monitor (HDMI, VGA or CVBS monitor) displays in full screen
the video image from the alarming channel configured for full screen monitoring.
If alarms are triggered simultaneously in several channels, their full-screen images will be switched
at an interval of 10 seconds (default dwell time). A different dwell time can be set by going to
Menu > Configuration > Live View.
Auto-switch will terminate once the alarm stops and you will be taken back to the Live View
interface.
Audible Warning
Trigger an audible beep when an alarm is detected.
Notify Surveillance Center
Sends an exception or alarm signal to remote alarm host when an event occurs. The alarm host
refers to the PC installed with Remote Client.
163
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
The alarm signal will be transmitted automatically at detection mode when remote alarm host is
configured. Please refer to Chapter 12.2.6 Configuring More Settings for details of alarm host
configuration.
Send Email
Send an email with alarm information to a user or users when an alarm is detected.
Please refer to Chapter 12.2.8 Configuring Email for details of Email configuration.
Trigger Alarm Output
Trigger an alarm output when an alarm is triggered.
Step 1 Enter Alarm Output interface.
Menu> Configuration> Alarm> Alarm Output
Select an alarm output and set alarm name and dwell time.
Figure 8-19 Alarm Output Settings Interface
If Manually Clear is selected in the dropdown list of Dwell Time, you can clear it only by going to
Menu> Manual> Alarm.
Step 2 Click
button to set the arming schedule of alarm output.
Choose one day of a week and up to 8 time periods can be set within each day.
Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.
164
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 8-20 Set Arming Schedule of Alarm Output
Step 3 Repeat the above steps to set arming schedule of other days of a week. You can also click
Copy button to copy an arming schedule to other days.
Click the OK button to complete the arming schedule setting of alarm output.
Step 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
165
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 9 POS Configuration
This chapter is applicable to DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR
only.
9.1
Configuring POS Settings
Step 1 Enter the POS settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > POS > POS Settings
Step 2 Select the POS from the drop-down list. Up to 8 POS units are selectable.
Step 3 Check the checkbox to enable the POS function.
Figure 9-1 POS Settings
Step 4 Filter the POS privacy information if needed.
1) Click
after Privacy Settings to enter POS Privacy Information Filtering interface.
166
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 9-2 POS Privacy Information Filtering
2) Edit the Privacy Information in the text filed to hide the input information overlay. Up to 3
pieces of privacy information can be edited and no more than 32 characters can be input
for each piece of information.
3) Click OK to save the settings.
Step 5 Select the POS protocol to Universal Protocol, EPSON, AVE or NUCLEUS.
 Universal Protocol
Click the Advanced button to expand more settings when selecting the universal protocol. You
can set the start line tag, line break tag and end line tag for the POS overlay characters, and
the case-sensitive property of the characters.
Figure 9-3 Universal Protocol Settings
 NUCLEUS
If you select NUCLEUS protocol, reboot the device to take the new settings into effect.
Figure 9-4 NUCLEUS Protocol Settings
1) Click Set button to enter the NUCLEUS Settings interface.
167
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 9-5 NUCLEUS Settings
2) Edit the Employee, Shift and Terminal information. No more than 32 characters can be
input.
3) Click OK to save the settings.


If you select NUCLEUS protocol, the connection type defaults to be RS-232, and all the other
POS protocol will change to be NUCLEUS.
You should set Usage to be Transparent Channel for RS-232 settings in Menu >
Configuration > RS-232 first.
Step 6 Select the Connection Type to TCP, UDP, Multicast, RS-232, USB->RS-232 or Sniff, and click
Set to configure the parameters for each connection type.

TCP Connection
When using TCP connection, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each
POS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote IP Address for connecting the
DVR and the POS machine via TCP.
Figure 9-6 TCP Connection Settings

UDP Connection
When using UDP connection, the port must be set from 0 to 65535, and the port for each
POS machine must be unique. Input the Allowed Remote IP Address for connecting the
DVR and the POS machine via UDP.
168
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 9-7 UDP Connection Settings

USB->RS-232 Connection
Configure the port parameters of USB-to-RS-232 convertor, including the serial number of
port, baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity and flow ctrl.
When using USB->RS-232 convertor mode, the port of USB-to-RS-232 convertor and the POS must
be corresponding to each other, e.g., POS1 must be connected to port1 of the convertor.
Figure 9-8 USB-to-RS-232 Settings

RS-232 Connection
Connect the DVR and the POS machine via RS-232. The RS-232 settings can be configured
in Menu>Configuration>RS-232. The Usage must be set to Transparent Channel.
Figure 9-9 RS-232 Settings

Multicast Connection
When connecting the DVR and the POS machine via Multicast protocol, set the multicast
address and port.
169
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 9-10 Multicast Settings

Sniff Connection
Connect the DVR and the POS machine via Sniff. Configure the source address and
destination address settings.
Figure 9-11 Sniff Settings
Step 7 Set other parameters of characters overly.
4) Select the character encoding format from the drop-down list.
5) Select the overlay mode of the characters to display in scrolling or page mode.
6) Select the font size to small, medium or large.
7) Set the overlay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
8) Set the delay time of the characters. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 sec.
9) (Optional) Check the checkbox to enable the POS Overlay in Live View.
10) Select the font color for the characters.
Figure 9-12 Overlay Character Settings
170
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
You can adjust the size and position of textbox on the live view screen of POS settings interface by
dragging the frame.
Step 8 Click Apply to activate the settings.
Step 9 (Optional) You can click the Copy button to copy the current settings to other POS (s).
Figure 9-13 Copy POS Settings
9.2
Configuring Overlay Channel
Purpose
You can assign the POS machine to corresponding channel on which you want to overlay.
Step 1 Enter the Overlay Channel interface.
Menu > Configuration > POS > Overlay Channel
Step 2 Click to select an analog or IP camera from the camera list on the right, and then click a POS
item from the POS list you want to overlay on the selected camera.
Click
or
to go to the previous or next page of cameras.
171
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 9-14 Overlay Channel Settings
Step 3 You can also click
to overlay all POS items to the first 8 channels in order. And the
is used to clear all POS overlay settings.
Step 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
9.3
Configuring POS Alarm
Purpose
Set the POS alarm parameters to trigger certain channels to start recording, or trigger full screen
monitoring, audio warning, notifying the surveillance center, sending email and so on.
Step 1 Enter the POS Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > POS> POS Settings
Step 2 Follow the steps in Chapter 9.1-9.2 to configure the POS settings.
Step 3 Click
to enter the alarm settings interface.
172
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 9-15 Set Trigger Cameras of POS
Step 4 Click Trigger Channel tab and select one or more channels to record or become full-screen
monitoring when POS alarm is triggered.
Step 5 Set arming schedule of the channel.
Select Arming Schedule tab to set the channel’s arming schedule.
Choose one day of a week and up to eight time periods can be set within each day. Or you
can click the Copy button to copy the time period settings to other day(s).
Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.
Figure 9-16 Set Arming Schedule
Step 6 Click the Handling tab to set up alarm response actions of POS alarm (Refer to Chapter 8.7
Setting Alarm Response Actions).
Repeat the above steps to set up arming schedule of other days of a week.
Click the OK button to complete the POS settings of the channel.
Step 7 Select PTZ Linking tab and set PTZ linkage of the POS alarm.
173
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Set PTZ linking parameters and click the OK button to complete the settings of the alarm
input.
Please check whether the PTZ or speed dome supports PTZ linkage.
Figure 9-17 Set PTZ Linking
Step 8 Click OK to save the settings.
174
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 10 VCA Alarm
Purpose
The DVR can receive the VCA alarm (line crossing detection, intrusion detection, sudden scene
change detection and audio exception detection) sent by analog camera, and the VCA detection
must be enabled and configured on the camera settings interface first. All other VCA detection
features must be supported by the connected IP camera.





The DS-7100 series DVR do not support the VCA alarm.
DS-7200/7300/8100/9000HUHI series DVR support VCA (line crossing detection and
intrusion detection) of all channels. DS-7600HUHI-F/N series DVR support 2-ch VCA (line
crossing detection and intrusion detection). Channels with audio support audio exception
detection.
HQHI series DVR excluding 7100 series support 2-ch VCA (line crossing detection and
intrusion detection). Channels with audio support audio exception detection.
Other models support 1-ch VCA (line crossing detection and intrusion detection). Channels
with audio support audio exception detection.
For the analog channels, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with
other VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection and vehicle
detection and heat map or people counting functions. You can only enable one function.
10.1 Face Detection
Purpose
Face detection function detects the face appears in the surveillance scene, and some certain
actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface.
Menu > Camera > VCA
Step 2 Select the camera to configure the VCA.
You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA
detection.
175
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 10-1 Face Detection
Step 3 Select the VCA detection type to Face Detection.
Step 4 Click
to enter the face detection settings interface. Configure the trigger channel,
arming schedule, linkage action and PTZ linking for the face detection alarm. Please refer to
step 3 to step 5 of Chapter 8.2 Setting Sensor Alarms for detailed instructions.
Figure 10-2 PTZ Linking
Step 5 Click the Rule Settings button to set the face detection rules. You can drag the slider to set
the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity: Range [1-5]. The higher the value is, the more easily the face can be detected.
Figure 10-3 Set Face Detection Sensitivity
176
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 6 Click Apply to activate the settings.
10.2 Vehicle Detection
Purpose
Vehicle Detection is available for the road traffic monitoring. In Vehicle Detection, the passed
vehicle can be detected and the picture of its license plate can be captured. You can send alarm
signal to notify the surveillance center and upload the captured picture to FTP server.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface.
Menu> Camera> VCA
Step 2 Select the camera to configure the VCA.
You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA
detection.
Step 3 Select the VCA detection type to Vehicle Detection.
Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
Figure 10-4 Set Vehicle Detection
Step 5 Click
to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and PTZ linking.
The PTZ linking is only applicable to other list, not to whitelist and blacklist.
Step 6 Click the Rule Settings to enter the rule settings interface. Configure the lane, upload
picture and overlay content settings. Up to 4 lanes are selectable.
177
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 10-5 Rule Settings
Step 7 Click Save to save the settings.
Refer to the User Manual of Network Camera for the detailed instructions for the vehicle
detection.
10.3 Line Crossing Detection
Purpose
This function can be used for detecting people, vehicles and objects cross a set virtual line. The line
crossing direction can be set as bidirectional, from left to right or from right to left. And you can set
the duration for the alarm response actions, such as full screen monitoring, audible warning, etc.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface.
Menu> Camera> VCA
Step 2 Select the camera to configure the VCA.
You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA
detection.
Step 3 Select the VCA detection type to Line Crossing Detection.
Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
Step 5 Click
to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and PTZ linking
for the line crossing detection alarm.
Step 6 Click the Rule Settings button to set the line crossing detection rules.
1) Select the direction to A<->B, A->B or B->A.
A<->B: Only the arrow on the B side shows. When an object goes across the configured
line, both directions can be detected and alarms are triggered.
178
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
A->B: Only the object crossing the configured line from the A side to the B side can be
detected.
B->A: Only the object crossing the configured line from the B side to the A side can be
detected.
2) Drag the slider to set the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity: Range [1-100]. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can
be triggered.
3) Click OK to save the rule settings and return to the line crossing detection settings
interface.
Figure 10-6 Set Line Crossing Detection Rules
Step 7 Click
and set two points in the preview window to draw a virtual line.
You can use the
to clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
179
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 10-7 Draw Line for Line Crossing Detection
Step 8 Click Apply to activate the settings.
The sudden scene change detection and the line crossing detection cannot be enabled at the same
channel.
10.4 Intrusion Detection
Purpose
Intrusion detection function detects people, vehicle or other objects which enter and loiter in a
pre-defined virtual region, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface.
Menu> Camera> VCA
Step 2 Select the camera to configure the VCA.
You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA
detection.
Step 3 Select the VCA detection type to Intrusion Detection.
Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
Step 5 Click
to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and PTZ linking
for the intrusion detection alarm.
180
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 6 Click the Rule Settings button to set the intrusion detection rules. Set the following
parameters.
1) Threshold: Range [1s-10s], the threshold for the time of the object loitering in the region.
When the duration of the object in the defined detection area is longer than the set time,
the alarm will be triggered.
2) Drag the slider to set the detection sensitivity.
Sensitivity: Range [1-100]. The value of the sensitivity defines the size of the object which
can trigger the alarm. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be
triggered.
3) Percentage: Range [1-100]. Percentage defines the ratio of the in-region part of the object
which can trigger the alarm. For example, if the percentage is set as 50%, when the object
enters the region and occupies half of the whole region, the alarm is triggered.
Figure 10-8 Set Intrusion Crossing Detection Rules
4) Click OK to save the rule settings and back to the line crossing detection settings interface.
Step 7 Click
and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of
the detection region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be
configured.
You can use the
to clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
181
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 10-9 Draw Area for Intrusion Detection
Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.
The sudden scene change detection and the intrusion detection cannot be enabled at the same
channel.
10.5 Region Entrance Detection
Purpose
Region entrance detection function detects people, vehicle or other objects which enter a
pre-defined virtual region from the outside place, and some certain actions can be taken when the
alarm is triggered.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface.
Menu> Camera> VCA
Step 2 Select the camera to configure the VCA.
You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA
detection.
Step 3 Select the VCA detection type to Region Entrance Detection.
Step 4 Check the Enable checkbox to enable this function.
Step 5 Click
to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and PTZ linking
for the region entrance detection alarm.
Step 6 Click the Rule Settings button to set the sensitivity of the region entrance detection.
182
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Sensitivity: Range [0-100]. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can
be triggered.
Step 7 Click
and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of
the detection region, and right click to complete drawing. Only one region can be
configured.
You can use the
to clear the existing virtual line and re-draw it.
Figure 10-10 Set Region Entrance Detection
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.
10.6 Region Exiting Detection
Purpose
Region exiting detection function detects people, vehicle or other objects which exit from a
pre-defined virtual region, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.


Please refer to the Chapter 10.5 Region Entrance Detection for operating steps to configure
the region exiting detection.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
183
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
10.7 Loitering Detection
Purpose
Loitering detection function detects people, vehicle or other objects which loiter in a pre-defined
virtual region for some certain time, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is
triggered.



Please refer to the Chapter 10.4 Intrusion Detection for operating steps to configure the
loitering detection.
The Threshold [1s-10s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the object loitering in the
region. If you set the value as 5, alarm is triggered after the object loitering in the region for
5s; and if you set the value as 0, alarm is triggered immediately after the object entering
the region.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
10.8 People Gathering Detection
Purpose
People gathering detection alarm is triggered when people gather around in a pre-defined virtual
region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.



Please refer to the Chapter 10.4 Intrusion Detection for operating steps to configure the
people gathering detection.
The Percentage in the Rule Settings defines the gathering density of the people in the
region. Usually, when the percentage is small, the alarm can be triggered when small
number of people gathered in the defined detection region.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
10.9 Fast Moving Detection
Purpose
Fast moving detection alarm is triggered when people, vehicle or other objects move fast in a
pre-defined virtual region, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

Please refer to the Chapter 10.4 Intrusion Detection for operating steps to configure the fast
moving detection.
184
Digital Video Recorder User Manual


The Sensitivity in the Rule Settings defines the moving speed of the object which can
trigger the alarm. The higher the value is, the more easily a moving object can trigger the
alarm.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
10.10 Parking Detection
Purpose
Parking detection function detects illegal parking in places such as highway, one-way street, etc.,
and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.



Please refer to the Chapter 10.4 Intrusion Detection for operating steps to configure the
parking detection.
The Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the vehicle parking in the
region. If you set the value as 10, alarm is triggered after the vehicle stay in the region for
10s.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
10.11 Unattended Baggage Detection
Purpose
Unattended baggage detection function detects the objects left over in the pre-defined region
such as the baggage, purse, dangerous materials, etc., and a series of actions can be taken when
the alarm is triggered.



Please refer to the Chapter 10.4 Intrusion Detection for operating steps to configure the
unattended baggage detection.
The Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects left over in the
region. If you set the value as 10, alarm is triggered after the object is left and stay in the
region for 10s. And the Sensitivity defines the similarity degree of the background image.
Usually, when the sensitivity is high, a very small object left in the region can trigger the
alarm.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
10.12 Object Removal Detection
Purpose
185
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Object removal detection function detects the objects removed from the pre-defined region, such
as the exhibits on display, and a series of actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.



Please refer to the Chapter 10.4 Intrusion Detection for operating steps to configure the
object removal detection.
The Threshold [5s-20s] in the Rule Settings defines the time of the objects removed from
the region. If you set the value as 10, alarm is triggered after the object disappears from
the region for 10s. And the Sensitivity defines the similarity degree of the background
image. Usually, when the sensitivity is high, a very small object taken from the region can
trigger the alarm.
Up to 4 rules can be configured.
10.13 Audio Exception Detection
Purpose
Audio exception detection function detects the abnormal sounds in the surveillance scene, such as
the sudden increase/decrease of the sound intensity, and some certain actions can be taken when
the alarm is triggered.
The audio exception detection is supported by all analog channels.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface.
Menu> Camera> VCA
Step 2 Select the camera to configure the VCA.
You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA
detection.
Step 3 Select the VCA detection type to Audio Exception Detection.
Step 4 Click
to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and PTZ linking
for the audio exception alarm.
Step 5 Click the Rule Settings button to set the audio exception rules.
186
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 10-11 Set Audio Exception Detection Rules
1) Check the checkbox of Audio Loss Exception to enable the audio loss detection function.
2) Check the checkbox of Sudden Increase of Sound Intensity Detection to detect the sound
steep rise in the surveillance scene. You can set the detection sensitivity and threshold for
sound steep rise.
Sensitivity: Range [1-100], the smaller the value is, the more severe the change should be
to trigger the detection.
Sound Intensity Threshold: Range [1-100], it can filter the sound in the environment, the
louder the environment sound, the higher the value should be. You can adjust it according
to the real environment.
3) Check the checkbox of Sudden Decrease of Sound Intensity Detection to detect the sound
steep drop in the surveillance scene. You can set the detection sensitivity [1-100] for
sound steep drop.
Step 6 Click Apply to activate the settings.
10.14 Defocus Detection
Purpose
The image blur caused by defocus of the lens can be detected, and some certain actions can be
taken when the alarm is triggered.


Please refer to the Chapter 10.1 Face Detection for operating steps to configure the defocus
detection.
The Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100, and the higher the value is, the
more easily the defocus image can trigger the alarm.
187
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
10.15 Sudden Scene Change
Purpose
Scene change detection function detects the change of surveillance environment affected by the
external factors; such as the intentional rotation of the camera and some certain actions can be
taken when the alarm is triggered.

Please refer to the Chapter 10.1 Face Detection for operating steps to configure the scene
change detection.

The Sensitivity in the Rule Settings ranges from 1 to 100, and the higher the value is, the
more easily the change of scene can trigger the alarm.

For the analog cameras, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with
other VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection and vehicle
detection. You can only enable one function. If you have enabled line crossing detection or
intrusion detection, when you enable sudden scene change detection and apply the
settings, the following attention box pops up to remind you there is no enough resource
and ask you to disable the enabled VCA type(s) of the selected channel(s).
Figure 10-12 Disable Other VCA Type(s)
10.16 PIR Alarm
Purpose
A PIR (Passive Infrared) alarm is triggered when an intruder moves within the detector's field of
view. The heat energy dissipated by a person, or any other warm blooded creature such as dogs,
cats, etc., can be detected.
Step 1 Enter the VCA settings interface.
Menu> Camera> VCA
Step 2 Select the camera to configure the VCA.
You can check the checkbox of Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA
detection.
Step 3 Select the VCA detection type to PIR Alarm.
188
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 4 Click
to configure the trigger channel, arming schedule, linkage action and PTZ linking
for the PIR alarm.
Step 5 Click the Rule Settings button to set the rules. Please refer to the Chapter 10.1 Face
Detection for instructions.
Step 6 Click Apply to activate the settings.
189
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 11 VCA Search
With the configured VCA detection, the device supports the VCA search for the behavior search,
face search, plate search, people counting and heat map results.
The DS-7100 series DVR do not support the VCA search.
11.1 Face Search
Purpose
When there are detected face picture captured and saved in HDD, you can enter the Face Search
interface to search the picture and play the picture related video files according to the specified
conditions.
Before you start
Please refer to Chapter 10.1 Face Detection for configuring the face detection.
Step 1 Enter the Face Search interface.
Menu>VCA Search> Face Search
Step 2 Select the camera (s) for the face search.
Figure 11-1 Face Search
Step 3 Specify the start time and end time for searching the captured face pictures or video files.
Step 4 Upload the pictures from your local storage device for matching the detected face pictures.
190
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 5 Set the similarity level for the source pictures and the captured pictures.
Step 6 Click Search to start searching. The search results of face detection pictures are displayed
in list or in chart.
Figure 11-2 Face Search Interface
Step 7 Play the face picture related video file.
You can double click on a face picture to play its related video file in the view window on
the top right, or select a picture item and click
to play it.
You can also click
to stop the playing, or click
/
to play the previous/next file.
Step 8 If you want to export the captured face pictures to local storage device, connect the
storage device to the device and click Export All to enter the Export interface.
Click Export to export all face pictures to the storage device.
Please refer to Chapter 7 Backup for the operation of exporting files.
191
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 11-3 Export Files
11.2 Behavior Search
Purpose
The behavior analysis detects a series of suspicious behavior based on VCA detection, and certain
linkage methods will be enabled if the alarm is triggered.
Step 1 Enter the Behavior Search interface.
Menu>VCA Search> Behavior Search
Step 2 Select the camera (s) for the behavior search.
Step 3 Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched pictures.
Figure 11-4 Behavior Search Interface
192
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 4 Select the VCA detection type from the dropdown list, including the line crossing detection,
intrusion detection, unattended baggage detection, object removal detection, region
entrance detection, region exiting detection, parking detection, loitering detection, people
gathering detection and fast moving detection.
Step 5 Click Search to start searching. The search results of pictures are displayed in list or in
chart.
Figure 11-5 Behavior Search Results
Step 6 Play the behavior analysis picture related video file.
You can double click on a picture from the list to play its related video file in the view
window on the top right, or select a picture item and click
to play it.
You can also click
to stop the playing, or click
/
to play the previous/next file.
Step 7 If you want to export the captured pictures to local storage device, connect the storage
device to the device and click Export All to enter the Export interface.
Click Export to export all pictures to the storage device.
11.3 Plate Search
Purpose
You can search and view the matched captured vehicle plate picture and related information
according to the plate searching conditions including the start time/end time, country and plate
No.
Step 1 Enter the Plate Search interface.
Menu>VCA Search> Plate Search
Step 2 Select the camera (s) for the plate search.
193
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 3 Specify the start time and end time for searching the matched plate pictures.
Figure 11-6 Plate Search
Step 4 Select the country from the drop-down list for searching the location of the vehicle plate.
Step 5 Input the plate No. in the field for search.
Step 6 Click Search to start searching. The search results of detected vehicle plate pictures are
displayed in list or in chart.
Please refer to the Step 7 to Step 8 of Chapter 11.1 Face Search for the operation of the search
results.
11.4 People Counting
Purpose
The People Counting is used to calculate the number of people entered or left a certain configured
area and form in daily/weekly/monthly/annual reports for analysis.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, people counting is applicable to 1-ch analog camera.
The people counting function conflicts with line crossing detection, intrusion detection, sudden
scene change detection, face detection, vehicle detection and heat map. You can only enable one
function for the analog camera.
Step 1 Enter the People Counting interface.
Menu>VCA Search> People Counting
194
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 2 Select the camera for the people counting.
Step 3 Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report or Annual Report.
Step 4 Set the statistics time.
Step 5 Click the Counting button to start people counting statistics.
Figure 11-7 People Counting Interface
Step 6 You can click the Export button to export the statistics report in excel format.
11.5 Heat Map
Purpose
Heat map is a graphical representation of data represented by colors. The heat map function is
usually used to analyze the visit times and dwell time of customers in a configured area.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, heat map is applicable to 1-ch analog camera. The
heat map function conflicts with line crossing detection, intrusion detection, sudden scene change
detection, face detection, vehicle detection and people counting. You can only enable one function
for the analog camera.
Step 1 Enter the Heat Map interface.
Menu>VCA Search> Heat Map
Step 2 Select the camera for the heat map processing.
195
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 3 Select the report type to Daily Report, Weekly Report, Monthly Report or Annual Report.
Step 4 Set the statistics time.
Figure 11-8 Heat Map Interface
Step 5 Click the Counting button to export the report data and start heat map statistics, and the
results are displayed in graphics marked in different colors.
As shown in Figure 10-8, red color block (255, 0, 0) indicates the most welcome area, and blue
color block (0, 0, 255) indicates the less-popular area.
Step 6 You can click the Export button to export the statistics report in excel format.
196
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 12 Network Settings
12.1 Configuring General Settings
Purpose
Network settings must be properly configured before you operate DVR over network.
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Figure 12-1 Network Settings Interface (1)
DS-8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series have 2 self-adaptive 10M/100M/1000M
network interfaces. For DS-8100HQHI-F/N series, three working modes are configurable:
multi-address, load balance and network fault tolerance. For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series,
only multi-address and network fault tolerance are configurable. Other models have 1
self-adaptive 10M/100M/1000M network interface or 1 self-adaptive 10M/100Mbps network
interface.
Step 2 Select the General tab.
Step 3 On the General Settings interface, you can configure the following parameters: Working
Mode (applicable for DS-8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series), NIC Type,
IPv4 Address, IPv4 Gateway, MTU, DNS Server and Main NIC.
Working Mode
There are two 10M/100M/1000M NIC cards provided by the DS-8100HQHI-F/N and
DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series devices, and it allows the device to work in the
Multi-address, Load Balance and Net-fault Tolerance modes for DS-8100HQHI-F/N and
Multi-address and Net-fault Tolerance for DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N.
197
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
 Multi-address Mode: The parameters of the two NIC cards can be configured
independently. You can select LAN1 or LAN2 in the NIC type field for parameter settings.
You can select one NIC card as default route. And then the system is connecting with the
extranet and the data will be forwarded through the default route.
 Net-fault Tolerance Mode: The two NIC cards use the same IP address, and you can select
the Main NIC to LAN1 or LAN2. By this way, in case of one NIC card failure, the device will
automatically enable the other standby NIC card so as to ensure the normal running of the
whole system.
 Load Balance Mode: By using the same IP address and two NIC cards share the load of the
total bandwidth, which enables the system to provide two Gigabit network capacity.



The valid value of MTU is from 500 to 1500.
If the DHCP server is available, you can check the checkbox of Enable DHCP to
automatically obtain an IP address and other network settings from that server.
For -F series DVR, if DHCP is enabled, you can check the checkbox of Enable DNS DHCP or
uncheck it and edit the Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server.
Step 4 After having configured the general settings, click the Apply button to save the settings.
12.2 Configuring Advanced Settings
12.2.1 Configuring PPPoE Settings
Purpose
The DVR also allows access by Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE).
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Step 2 Select the PPPoE tab to enter the PPPoE Settings interface.
Figure 12-2 PPPoE Settings Interface
Step 3 Check the Enable PPPoE checkbox to enable this feature.
Step 4 Enter User Name and Password for PPPoE access.
The User Name and Password should be assigned by your ISP.
198
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
Step 6 After successful settings, the system asks you to reboot the device to enable the new
settings, and the PPPoE dial-up is automatically connected after reboot.
You can go to Menu > Maintenance > System Info > Network interface to view the status of
PPPoE connection.
12.2.2 Configuring Hik Cloud P2P
Purpose
Hik Cloud P2P provides the mobile phone application and as well the service platform page to
access and manage your connected DVR, which enables you to get a convenient remote access to
the surveillance system.
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Step 2 Select the Platform Access tab to enter the Hik Cloud P2P Settings interface.
Step 3 Check the Enable checkbox to activate this feature.
Step 4 If required, select the checkbox of Custom and input the Server Address.
Step 5 To turn the Enable Stream Encryption on, you can select its checkbox.
Step 6 Enter the Verification Code of the device.
The verification code consists of 6 capital letters and is located at the bottom of the DVR. You can
also use the scanning tool of your phone to quickly get the code by scanning the QR code below.
Figure 12-3 Hik Cloud P2P Settings Interface
Step 7 Click the Apply button to save and exit the interface.
After configuration, you can access and manage the DVR by your mobile phone on which
the Hik Cloud P2P application is installed or by the website (dev.hik-connect.com).
199
Digital Video Recorder User Manual


Hik Cloud P2P is disabled by default.
For more operation instructions, please refer to the help file on the official website
(dev.hik-connect.com).
12.2.3 Configuring DDNS
Purpose
If your DVR is set to use PPPoE as its default network connection, you may set Dynamic DNS (DDNS)
to be used for network access.
Prior registration with your ISP is required before configuring the system to use DDNS.
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Step 2 Select the DDNS tab to enter the DDNS Settings interface.
Step 3 Check the Enable DDNS checkbox to enable this feature.
Step 4 Select DDNS Type. Three different DDNS types are selectable: DynDNS, PeanutHull, and
NO-IP.

DynDNS:
1) Enter Server Address for DynDNS (i.e. members.dyndns.org).
2) In the Device Domain Name text field, enter the domain obtained from the DynDNS
website.
3) Enter the User Name and Password registered in the DynDNS website.
Figure 12-4 DynDNS Settings Interface

PeanutHull: Enter the User Name and Password obtained from the PeanutHull
website.
200
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 12-5 PeanutHull Settings Interface

NO-IP:
Enter the account information in the corresponding fields. Refer to the DynDNS
settings.
1) Enter Server Address for NO-IP.
2) In the Device Domain Name text field, enter the domain obtained from the NO-IP
website (www.no-ip.com).
3) Enter the User Name and Password registered in the NO-IP website.
Figure 12-6 NO-IP Settings Interface
Step 5 Click the Apply button to save and exit the interface.
12.2.4 Configuring NTP Server
Purpose
A Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server can be configured on your DVR to ensure the accuracy of
system date/time.
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Step 2 Select the NTP tab to enter the NTP Settings interface.
201
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 12-7 NTP Settings Interface
Step 3 Check the Enable NTP checkbox to enable this feature.
Step 4 Configure the following NTP settings:
 Interval: Time interval between the two synchronizing actions with NTP server. The unit is
minute.
 NTP Server: IP address of NTP server.
 NTP Port: Port of NTP server.
Step 5 Click the Apply button to save and exit the interface.
The time synchronization interval can be set from 1 to 10080 minutes, and the default value is 60
minutes. If the DVR is connected to a public network, you should use a NTP server that has a time
synchronization function, such as the server at the National Time Center (IP Address:
210.72.145.44). If the DVR is set in a more customized network, NTP software can be used to
establish a NTP server used for time synchronization.
12.2.5 Configuring NAT
Purpose
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP™) can permit the device seamlessly discover the presence of other
network devices on the network and establish functional network services for data sharing,
communications, etc. You can use the UPnP™ function to enable the fast connection of the device
to the WAN via a router without port mapping.
Before you start
If you want to enable the UPnP™ function of the device, you must enable the UPnP™ function of
the router to which your device is connected. When the network working mode of the device is set
as multi-address, the Default Route of the device should be in the same network segment as that
of the LAN IP address of the router.
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Step 2 Select the NAT tab to enter the UPnP™ Settings interface.
202
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 12-8 UPnP™ Settings Interface
Step 3 Check Enable UPnP checkbox to enable UPnP™.
Step 4 Select the Mapping Type as Manual or Auto in the drop-down list.
OPTION 1: Auto
If you select Auto, the Port Mapping items are read-only, and the external ports are set by the
router automatically.
1) Click Apply button to save the settings.
2) You can click Refresh button to get the latest status of the port mapping.
Figure 12-9 UPnP™ Settings Finished-Auto
OPTION 2: Manual
If you select Manual as the mapping type, you can edit the external port on your demand by
clicking
to activate the External Port Settings dialog box.
1) Click
to activate the External Port Settings dialog box. Configure the external port No.
for server port, http port and RTSP port respectively.



You can use the default port No., or change it according to actual requirements.
External Port indicates the port No. for port mapping in the router.
The value of the RTSP port No. should be 554 or between 1024 and 65535, while the value
of the other ports should be between 1 and 65535 and the value must be different from
each other. If multiple devices are configured for the UPnP™ settings under the same router,
the value of the port No. for each device should be unique.
203
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 12-10 External Port Settings Dialog Box
2) Click Apply button to save the settings.
3) You can click Refresh button to get the latest status of the port mapping.
Figure 12-11 UPnP™ Settings Finished-Manual
12.2.6 Configuring More Settings
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Step 2 Select the More Settings tab to enter the More Settings interface.
Figure 12-12 More Settings Interface
Step 3 Configure the remote alarm host, server port, HTTP port, multicast, and RTSP port.
 Alarm Host IP/Port: With a remote alarm host configured, the device will send the alarm
event or exception message to the host when an alarm is triggered. The remote alarm
host must have the CMS (Client Management System) software installed.
The Alarm Host IP refers to the IP address of the remote PC on which the CMS (Client
Management System) software (e.g., iVMS-4200) is installed, and the Alarm Host Port
must be the same as the alarm monitoring port configured in the software (default port is
7200).
 Multicast IP: The multicast can be configured to realize live view for more than the
maximum number of cameras through network. A multicast address spans the Class-D IP
204
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. It is recommended to use the IP address ranging
from 239.252.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
When adding a device to the CMS (Client Management System) software, the multicast
address must be the same as the device’s multicast IP.
 RTSP Port: The RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) is a network control protocol
designed for use in entertainment and communications systems to control streaming
media servers.
Enter the RTSP port in the text field of RTSP Port. The default RTSP port is 554, and you
can change it according to different requirements.
 Server Port and HTTP Port: Enter the Server Port and HTTP Port in the text fields. The
default Server Port is 8000 and the HTTP Port is 80, and you can change them according
to different requirements.
The Server Port should be set to the range of 2000-65535 and it is used for remote client software
access. The HTTP port is used for remote IE access.
 Output Bandwidth Limit: You can check the checkbox to enable output bandwidth limit.
 Output Bandwidth: After enable the output bandwidth limit, input the output bandwidth
in the text field.



Enabling output bandwidth limit and settings output bandwidth options are applicable for
-F series DVR.
The output bandwidth limit is used for the remote live view and playback.
The minimum output bandwidth is 2 Mbps.
Step 4 Click the Apply button to save and exit the interface.
12.2.7 Configuring HTTPS Port
Purpose
HTTPS provides authentication of the web site and associated web server that one is
communicating with, which protects against Man-in-the-middle attacks. Perform the following
steps to set the port number of https.
Example
If you set the port number as 443 and the IP address is 192.0.0.64, you may access the device by
inputting https://192.0.0.64:443 via the web browser.
The HTTPS port can be only configured through the web browser.
205
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 1 Open web browser, input the IP address of device, and the web server will select the
language automatically according to the system language and maximize the web browser.
Step 2 Input the correct user name and password, and click Login button to log in the device.
Step 3 Enter the HTTPS settings interface.
Configuration > Remote Configuration > Network Settings > HTTPS
Step 4 Create the self-signed certificate or authorized certificate.
Figure 12-13 HTTPS Settings
OPTION 1: Create the self-signed certificate
1) Click the Create button to create the following dialog box.
Figure 12-14 Create Self-signed Certificate
2) Enter the country, host name/IP, validity and other information.
3) Click OK to save the settings.
OPTION 2: Create the authorized certificate
1) Click the Create button to create the certificate request.
2) Download the certificate request and submit it to the trusted certificate authority for
signature.
206
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
3) After receiving the signed valid certificate, import the certificate to the device.
Step 5 There will be the certificate information after you successfully create and install the
certificate.
Figure 12-15 Installed Certificate Property
Step 6 Check the checkbox to enable the HTTPS function.
Step 7 Click the Save button to save the settings.
12.2.8 Configuring Email
Purpose
The system can be configured to send an Email notification to all designated users if an event is
detected, e.g. an alarm or motion event is detected, etc.
Before configuring the Email settings, the DVR must be connected to a local area network (LAN)
that maintains an SMTP mail server. The network must also be connected to either an intranet or
the Internet depending on the location of the e-mail accounts to which you want to send
notification. Additional, the Preferred DNS server must be configured.
Before you start
Make sure you have configured the IPv4 Address, IPv4 Subnet Mask, IPv4 Gateway and the
Preferred DNS Server in the Network Settings menu. Please refer to Chapter 12.1 Configuring
General Settings for detailed information.
Step 1 Enter the Network Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > Network
Step 2 Select the Email tab to enter the Email Settings interface.
207
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 12-16 Email Settings Interface
Step 3 Configure the following Email settings:
Enable Server Authentication (optional): Check the checkbox to enable the server
authentication feature.
User Name: The user account of sender’s Email for SMTP server authentication.
Password: The password of sender’s Email for SMTP server authentication.
SMTP Server: The SMTP Server IP address or host name (e.g., smtp.263xmail.com).
SMTP Port: The SMTP port. The default TCP/IP port used for SMTP is 25.
Enable SSL (optional): Click the checkbox to enable SSL if required by the SMTP server.
Sender: The name of sender.
Sender’s Address: The Email address of sender.
Select Receivers: Select the receiver. Up to 3 receivers can be configured.
Receiver: The name of the receiver of the Email.
Receiver’s Address: The Email address of the receiver.
Enable Attached Picture: Check the checkbox if you want to send email with attached
alarm images. The interval is the time between two captures of the alarm images.


For the IP cameras, the alarm images are directly sent as the attached pictures by Email. Up
to one picture can be sent for one IP camera. The attached pictures of the linked cameras
cannot be sent.
For analog cameras, 3 attached pictures can be sent for one analog camera when the alarm
is triggered.
Interval: The interval refers to the time between two actions of sending attached pictures.
208
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
E-mail Test: Sends a test message to verify that the SMTP server can be reached.
Step 4 Click the Apply button to save the Email settings.
Step 5 You can click the Test button to test whether your Email settings work. The corresponding
Attention message box pops up.
Figure 12-17 Email Testing Attention
12.2.9 Checking Network Traffic
Purpose
You can check the network traffic to obtain real-time information of DVR such as linking status,
MTU, sending/receiving rate, etc.
Step 1 Enter the Network Traffic interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect
Figure 12-18 Network Traffic Interface
Step 2 You can view the sending rate and receiving rate information on the interface. The traffic
data is refreshed every 1 second.
12.3 Configuring Network Detection
Purpose
You can obtain network connecting status of DVR through the network detection function,
including network delay, packet loss, etc.
209
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
12.3.1 Testing Network Delay and Packet Loss
Step 1 Enter the Network Traffic interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect
Step 2 Click the Network Detection tab to enter the Network Detection interface.
Figure 12-19 Network Detection Interface
Step 3 Select a NIC to test network delay and packet loss.
Step 4 Enter the destination address in the text field of Destination Address.
Step 5 Click the Test button to start testing network delay and packet loss.
12.3.2 Exporting Network Packet
Purpose
By connecting the DVR to network, the captured network data packet can be exported to USB-flash
disk, SATA and other local backup devices.
Step 1 Enter the Network Traffic interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect
Step 2 Click the Network Detection tab to enter the Network Detection interface.
Step 3 Select the backup device from the dropdown list of Device Name.
Click the Refresh button if the connected local backup device cannot be displayed. When it fails to
detect the backup device, please check whether it is compatible with the DVR. You can format the
backup device if the format is incorrect.
210
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 12-20 Export Network Packet
Step 4 Click the Export button to start exporting.
Step 5 After the exporting is complete, click OK to finish the packet export.
Figure 12-21 Packet Export Attention
Up to 1M data can be exported each time.
12.3.3 Checking Network Status
Purpose
You can also check the network status and quick set the network parameters in this interface.
Step 1 Enter the Network Traffic interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Net Detect
Step 2 Click the Network Detection tab to enter the Network Detection interface.
Step 3 Click Status on the right bottom of the interface.
Figure 12-22 Checking Network Status
If the network is normal the following message box pops out.
211
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 12-23 Network Status Checking Result
If the message box pops out with other information instead of this one, you can click
Network button to show the quick setting interface of the network parameters.
Figure 12-24 Network Parameters Configuration
12.3.4 Checking Network Statistics
Purpose:
You can check the network statistics to obtain the real-time information of the device.
Step 1 Enter the Network Statistics interface.
Menu > Maintenance> Net Detect
Step 2 Click the Network Stat. tab to enter the Network Statistics interface.
Figure 12-25 Network Stat. Interface
212
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 3 View the bandwidth of Remote Live View, bandwidth of Remote Playback, and bandwidth
of Net Total Idle.
Step 4 Click Refresh button to get the latest bandwidth statistics.
213
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 13 RAID
This chapter is applicable for DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR.
13.1 Configuring Array
Purpose
RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a storage technology that combines multiple disk
drive components into a logical unit. A RAID setup stores data over multiple hard disk drives to
provide enough redundancy so that data can be recovered if one disk fails. Data is distributed
across the drives in one of several ways called "RAID levels", depending on what level of
redundancy and performance is required.
The DVR supports the disk array that is realized by software. You can enable the RAID function on
your demand.
The DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR support the RAID0, RAID1, RAID5, RAID6 and RAID 10
array types.
Before you start
Please install the HDD(s) properly and it is recommended to use the same enterprise-level HDDs
(including model and capacity) for array creation and configuration so as to maintain reliable and
stable running of the disks.
Introduction
The DVR can store the data (such as record, picture, log information) in the HDD only after you
have created the array or you have configured network HDD (refer to Chapter14.2 Managing
Network HDD). Our device provides two ways for creating array, including one-touch configuration
and manual configuration. The following flow chart shows the process of creating array.
214
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 13-1 RAID Working Flow
13.1.1 Enable RAID
Purpose
Perform the following steps to enable the RAID function, or the disk array cannot be created.

OPTION 1:
Enable the RAID function in the Wizard when the device startup, please refer to step 7 of Chapter
2.3.2.

OPTION 2:
Enable the RAID function in the HDD Management Interface.
Step 1 Enter the Disk Mode configuration interface.
Menu > HDD > Advanced
Figure 13-2 Enable RAID Interface
Step 2 Check the checkbox of Enable RAID.
Step 3 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
Step 4 Reboot the device to take RAID into effect.
215
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
13.1.2 One-touch Configuration
Purpose
Through one-touch configuration, you can quickly create the disk array. By default, the array type
to be created is RAID 5.
Before you start
1. The RAID function should be enabled, please refer to the Chapter 13.1.1 for details.
2. As the default array type is RAID 5, please install at least 3 HDDs in you device.
3. If more than 10 HDDs are installed, 2 arrays can be configured.
Step 1 Enter the RAID configuration interface.
Menu > HDD > RAID
Figure 13-3 Physical Disk Interface
Step 2 Check the checkbox of corresponding HDD No. to select it.
Step 3 Click the One-touch Config button to enter the One-touch Array Configuration interface.
Figure 13-4 One-touch Array Configuration
216
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 4 Edit the array name in the Array Name text filed and click OK button to start configuring
array.
If you install 4 HDDs or above for one-touch configuration, a hot spare disk will be set by default. It
is recommended to set hot spare disk for automatically rebuilding the array when the array is
abnormal.
Step 5 When the array configuration is completed, click OK button in the pop-up message box to
finish the settings.
Step 6 You can click Array tab to view the information of the successfully created array.
By default, one-touch configuration creates an array and a virtual disk.
Figure 13-5 Array Settings Interface
Step 7 A created array displays as an HDD in the HDD information interface.
Figure 13-6 HDD Information Interface
13.1.3 Manually Creating Array
Purpose
You can manually create the array of RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID6 and RAID 10.
In this chapter, we take RAID 5 as an example to describe the manual configuration of array and
virtual disk.
Step 1 Enter the Physical Disk Settings interface.
Menu > HDD > RAID > Physical Disk
217
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 13-7 Physical Disk Settings Interface
Step 2 Click Creat button to enter the Create Array interface.
Figure 13-8 Create Array Interface
Step 3 Edit the Array Name; set the RAID Level to RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID6 or RAID 10; select
the Physical Disk that you want to configure array.





If you choose RAID 0, at least 2 HDDs must be installed.
If you choose RAID 1, 2 HDDs need to be configured for RAID 1.
If you choose RAID 5, at least 3 HDDs must be installed.
If you choose RAID 6, at least 4 HDDs must be installed.
If you choose RAID 10, the number of HDDs installed should be even in the range of 4 to 16.
Step 4 Click OK button to create array.
218
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
If the number of HDDs you select is not compatible with the requirement of the RAID level, the
error message box will pop up.
Figure 13-9 Error Message Box
Step 5 You can click Array tab to view the successfully created array.
Figure 13-10 Array Settings Interface
13.2 Rebuilding Array
Purpose
The working status of array includes Functional, Degraded and Offline. By viewing the array status,
you can take immediate and proper maintenance for the disks so as to ensure the high security
and reliability of the data stored in the disk array.
When there is no disk loss in the array, the working status of array will change to Functional; when
the number of lost disks has exceeded the limit, the working status of array will change to Offline;
in other conditions, the working status is Degraded.
When the virtual disk is in Degraded status, you can restore it to Functional by array rebuilding.
Before you start
Please make sure the hot spare disk is configured.
Step 1 Enter the Physical Disk Settings interface to configure the hot spare disk.
219
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 13-11 Physical Disk Settings Interface
Step 2 Select a disk and click
to set it as the hot spare disk.
Only global hot spare mode is supported.
13.2.1 Automatically Rebuilding Array
Purpose
When the virtual disk is in Degraded status, the device can start rebuilding the array automatically
with the hot spare disk to ensure the high security and reliability of the data.
Step 1 Enter the Array Settings interface. The status of the array is Degraded. Since the hot spare
disk is configured, the system will automatically start rebuilding using it.
Menu > HDD > RAID > Array
Figure 13-12 Array Settings Interface
If there is no hot spare disk after rebuilding, it is recommended to install a HDD into the device
and set is as a hot spare disk to ensure the high security and reliability of the array.
13.2.2 Manually Rebuilding Array
Purpose
If the hot spare disk has not been configured, you can rebuild the array manually to restore the
array when the virtual disk is in Degraded status.
220
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 1 Enter the Array Settings interface. The disk 3 is lost.
Menu > HDD > RAID > Array
Figure 13-13 Array Settings Interface
Step 2 Click Array tab to return to the Array Settings interface and click
rebuild.
to configure the array
At least one available physical disk should exist for rebuilding the array.
Figure 13-14 Rebuild Array Interface
Step 3 Select the available physical disk and click OK button to confirm to rebuild the array.
Step 4 The “Do not unplug the physical disk when it is under rebuilding” message box pops up.
Click OK button to start rebuilding.
Step 5 You can enter the Array Settings interface to view the rebuilding status.
Step 6 After rebuilding successfully, the array and virtual disk will restore to Functional.
13.3 Deleting Array
Deleting array will cause to delete all the data saved in the disk.
Step 1 Enter the Array Settings interface.
Menu>HDD>RAID>Array
221
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 13-15 Array Settings Interface
Step 2 Select an array and click
to delete the array.
Figure 13-16 Confirm Array Deletion
Step 3 In the pop-up message box, click Yes button to confirm the array deletion.
Deleting array will cause to delete all the data in the array.
13.4 Checking and Editing Firmware
Purpose
You can view the information of the firmware and set the background task speed on the Firmware
interface.
Step 1 Enter the Firmware interface to check the information of the firmware, including the
version, maximum physical disk quantity, maximum array quantity, auto-rebuild status, etc.
Figure 13-17 Firmware Interface
Step 2 You can set the Background Task Speed in the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
222
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 14 HDD Management
14.1 Initializing HDDs
Purpose
A newly installed hard disk drive (HDD) must be initialized before it can be used with your DVR.
Step 1 Enter the HDD Information interface.
Menu > HDD > General
Figure 14-1 HDD Information Interface
You can view the Total Capacity, Free Space and Remaining Recording Time of the HDD. The
algorithm of the Remaining Recording Time is to use average bit rate for the channel
enabling smart encoding to raise accuracy.
Step 2 Select HDD to be initialized.
Step 3 Click the Init button.
Figure 14-2 Confirm Initialization
Step 4 Select the OK button to start initialization.
223
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-3 Start Initialization
Step 5 After the HDD has been initialized, the status of the HDD will change from Uninitialized to
Normal.
Figure 14-4 HDD Status Changes to Normal
Initializing the HDD will erase all data on it.
The HDDs which are free of working for a long time can be enabled to sleep, thus to decrease the
power consumption of the device and extend the life of the HDDs.
Click Menu > HDD > Advanced
Figure 14-5 Enable HDD Sleeping
Check the checkbox of Enable HDD Sleeping (by default), and the HDDs which are free of working
for a long time will be set to sleep.
Uncheck the checkbox of Enable HDD Sleeping, and the HDDs will be set to work for all time.
14.2 Managing Network HDD
Purpose
You can add the allocated NAS or disk of IP SAN to DVR, and use it as network HDD.
Step 1 Enter the HDD Information interface.
Menu > HDD>General
224
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-6 HDD Information Interface
Step 2 Click the Add button to enter the Add NetHDD interface, as shown in Figure 14-7.
Figure 14-7 HDD Information Interface
Step 3 Add the allocated NetHDD.
Step 4 Select the type to NAS or IP SAN.
Step 5 Configure the NAS or IP SAN settings.
 Add NAS disk:
1) Enter the NetHDD IP address in the text field.
2) Click Search to search the available NAS disks.
3) Select the NAS disk from the list shown below.
Or you can just manually enter the directory in the text field of NetHDD Directory.
4) Click OK to add the configured NAS disk.
Up to 8 NAS disks can be added.
225
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-8 Add NAS Disk
 Add IP SAN:
1) Enter the NetHDD IP address in the text field.
2) Click the Search button to the available IP SAN disks.
3) Select the IP SAN disk from the list shown below.
4) Click the OK button to add the selected IP SAN disk.
Up to 8 IP SAN disks can be added.
Figure 14-9 Add IP SAN Disk
5) After having successfully added the NAS or IP SAN disk, return to the HDD Information
menu. The added NetHDD will be displayed in the list.
If the added NetHDD is uninitialized, please select it and click the Init button for initialization.
226
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-10 Initialize Added NetHDD
14.3 Managing HDD Group
14.3.1 Setting HDD Groups
Purpose
Multiple HDDs can be managed in groups. Video from specified channels can be recorded onto a
particular HDD group through HDD settings.
Step 1 Enter the Storage Mode interface.
Menu > HDD > Advanced
Step 2 Set the Mode to Group, as shown in Figure 14-11.
Figure 14-11 Storage Mode Interface
Step 3 Click the Apply button and the following Attention box will pop up.
Figure 14-12 Attention for Reboot
Step 4 Click the Yes button to reboot the device to activate the changes.
Step 5 After reboot of device, enter the HDD Information interface.
Menu > HDD > General
Step 6 Select HDD from the list and click the
as shown in Figure 14-13.
icon to enter the Local HDD Settings interface,
227
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-13 Local HDD Settings Interface
Step 7 Select the Group number for the current HDD.
The default group No. for each HDD is 1.
Step 8 Click the OK button to confirm the settings.
Figure 14-14 Confirm HDD Group Settings
Step 9 In the pop-up Attention box, click the Yes button to finish the settings.
14.3.2 Setting HDD Property
Purpose
The HDD property can be set to redundancy, read-only or read/write (R/W). Before setting the
HDD property, please set the storage mode to Group (refer to step1-4 of Chapter 14.3.1 Setting
HDD Groups).
A HDD can be set to read-only to prevent important recorded files from being overwritten when
the HDD becomes full in overwrite recording mode.
When the HDD property is set to redundancy, the video can be recorded both onto the redundancy
HDD and the R/W HDD simultaneously so as to ensure high security and reliability of video data.
Step 1 Enter the HDD Information interface.
Menu > HDD > General
Step 2 Select HDD from the list and click the
as shown in Figure 14-15.
icon to enter the Local HDD Settings interface,
228
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-15 Set HDD Property
Step 3 Set the HDD property to R/W, Read-only or Redundancy.
Step 4 Click the OK button to save the settings and exit the interface.
Step 5 In the HDD Information menu, the HDD property will be displayed in the list.
At least 2 hard disks must be added on your DVR when you want to set a HDD to Redundancy, and
there is one HDD with R/W property.
14.4 Configuring Quota Mode
Purpose
Each camera can be configured with allocated quota for the storage of recorded files.
Steps
Step 1 Enter the Storage Mode interface.
Menu > HDD > Advanced
Step 2 Click the Storage Mode tab.
Step 3 Set the Mode to Quota, as shown in Figure 14-16.
The DVR must be rebooted to enable the changes to take effect.
229
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-16 Storage Mode Settings Interface
Step 4 Select a camera for which you want to configure quota.
Step 5 Enter the storage capacity in the text field of Max. Record Capacity (GB).
Step 6 You can copy the quota settings of the current camera to other cameras if required. Click
the Copy button to enter the Copy Camera interface, as shown in Figure 14-17.
Figure 14-17 Copy Settings to Other Camera(s)
Step 7 Select the camera (s) to be configured with the same quota settings. You can also click the
checkbox of Analog to select all cameras.
Step 8 Click the OK button to finish the Copy settings and back to the Storage Mode interface.
Step 9 Click the Apply button to apply the settings.
If the quota capacity is set to 0, then all cameras will use the total capacity of HDD for record.
14.5 Configuring Cloud Storage
Purpose
230
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
The cloud storage facilitates you to upload and download the recorded files at any time and any
place, which can highly enhance the efficiency.
Cloud storage is only applicable to HQHI-F/N and HUHI series DVR.
Step 1 Enter the Cloud Storage interface
Menu > HDD > General > Cloud Storage
Step 2 Check the Enable Cloud checkbox to enable the feature.
Step 3 Select the Cloud Type from the dropdown list to One Drive, Google Drive or Drop Box.
Figure 14-18 Cloud Storage Interface
Step 4 According to the prompts, you are required to use a mobile browser to scan the QR code to
log in the selected cloud to get the authentication code. And then copy the authentication
code to the Authentication Code text filed.
Step 5 Click Apply and then back to the main menu.
Step 6 Enter the cloud storage interface again about 20s later. When the Status shows online, it
indicates the successful registration.
Step 7 Configure the recording schedule.
Back to enter the record interface, choose a certain camera from the Camera dropdown list
and check the Enable Schedule checkbox to enable the schedule recording. For detailed
recording schedule, refer to 5.2 Configuring Recording and Capture Schedule.
231
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-19 Record Schedule
The POS recording is supported by DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N
series DVR only.
Step 8 Upload the event triggered recording files to the cloud storage.
1) Back to enter the cloud storage interface, and select the camera you have set in the
recording schedule interface.
2) Select the upload type in the Upload Type text filed.
3) Check the Enable Event Upload checkbox.
4) Click Apply to finish the settings.
Figure 14-20 Upload to Cloud Storage Interface

Only the sub-stream recorded files can be uploaded to the Cloud Storage.
232
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Please configure the event triggered recording schedule and enable the corresponding
event type.
Step 9 (Optional) You can click the Copy button to copy the cloud storage settings to other
cameras. You can also click the checkbox of Analog/IP Camera to select all cameras.
Click OK button to back to the cloud storage interface and click Apply to finish the settings.
Figure 14-21 Copy to Interface
14.6 Configuring Disk Clone
This chapter is only applicable to the DVR with eSATA.
Purpose
If the S.M.A.R.T. detection result declares the HDD is abnormal, you can choose to clone all the
data on the HDD to an inserted eSATA disk manually. Refer to Chapter 14.8 Checking S.M.A.R.T.
Information for details of S.M.A.R.T detection.
Before you start
An eSATA disk should be connected to the device.
Step 1 Enter the HDD Advanced Setting interface:
Menu > HDD > Advanced
Step 2 Click the Disk Clone tab to enter the disk clone configuring interface.
233
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-22 Disk Clone Configuration Interface
Step 3 Make sure the usage of the eSATA disk is set as Export.
If not, click the Set button to set it. Choose Export and click the OK button.
Figure 14-23 Setting eSATA Usage
The capacity of destination disk must be the same as that of the clone source disk.
Step 4 Check the checkbox of the HDD to be cloned in the Clone Source list.
Step 5 Click the Clone button and a message box pops up.
Figure 14-24 Message Box for Disk Clone
Step 6 Click the Yes button to continue.
You can check the clone progress in the HDD status.
234
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-25 Check Disk Clone Progress
14.7 Checking HDD Status
Purpose
You may check the status of the installed HDDs on DVR so as to take immediate check and
maintenance in case of HDD failure.
Checking HDD Status in HDD Information Interface
Step 1 Enter the HDD Information interface.
Menu > HDD > General
Step 2 Check the status of each HDD which is displayed on the list, as shown in Figure 14-26.
Figure 14-26 View HDD Status (1)
If the status of HDD is Normal or Sleeping, it works normally. If the status is Uninitialized or
Abnormal, please initialize the HDD before use. And if the HDD initialization is failed, please
replace it with a new one.
Checking HDD Status in System Information Interface
Step 1 Enter the System Information interface.
Menu > Maintenance > System Info
Step 2 Click the HDD tab to view the status of each HDD displayed on the list, as shown in Figure
14-27.
Figure 14-27 View HDD Status (2)
14.8 Checking S.M.A.R.T Information
Purpose
235
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
The S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting Technology) is a monitoring system for
HDD to detect and report on various indicators of reliability in the hopes of anticipating failures.
Step 1 Enter the HDD Detect interface.
Menu > Maintenance > HDD Detect
Step 2 Click the S.M.A.R.T. Settings tab to enter the interface.
Step 3 Select the HDD to view its S.M.A.R.T. information list, as shown in Figure 14-28.
If you want to use the HDD even when the S.M.A.R.T. checking is failed, you can check the
checkbox before the Continue to use this disk when self-evaluation is failed item.
Figure 14-28 S.M.A.R.T Settings Interface
14.9 Detecting Bad Sector
Purpose
You can detect the bad sector of the HDD to check the status of the HDD.
Step 1 Enter the HDD Detect interface.
Menu>HDD>HDD Detect
Step 2 Click the Bad Sector Detection tab to enter the interface.
Step 3 Select a HDD and click the Detect button to start detecting.
236
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-29 Bad Sector Detecting
Step 4 You can click the Pause button to pause the detection and click the Resume button to
resume the detection.
Step 5 If there is error information about the HDD, you can click the Error Info button to view the
information.
14.10 Configuring HDD Error Alarms
Purpose
You can configure the HDD error alarms when the HDD status is Uninitialized or Abnormal.
Step 1 Enter the Exception interface.
Menu > Configuration > Exceptions
Step 2 Select the Exception Type to HDD Error from the dropdown list.
Step 3 Check the checkbox(s) below to select the linkage action(s) for HDD error, as shown in
Figure 14-30.
The linkage actions can be selected to: Audible Warning, Notify Surveillance Center, Send
Email and Trigger Alarm Output.
237
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 14-30 Configure HDD Error Alarm
Step 4 When the Trigger Alarm Output is selected, you can also select the alarm output to be
triggered from the list below.
Step 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
238
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 15 Camera Settings
15.1 Configuring OSD Settings
Purpose
You can configure the OSD (On-Screen Display) settings for the camera, including date/time,
camera name, etc.
Step 1 Enter the OSD Configuration interface.
Menu > Camera > OSD
Step 2 Select the camera to configure OSD settings.
Step 3 Edit the Camera Name in the text field.
Step 4 Configure the Display Name, Display Date and Display Week by checking the checkbox.
Step 5 Select the Date Format, Time Format, Display Mode and the OSD Font.
Figure 15-1 OSD Configuration Interface
Step 6 You can use the mouse to drag the text frame on the preview window to adjust the OSD
position.
Step 7 Copy Camera Settings
1) If you want to copy the OSD settings of the current camera to other cameras, click the
Copy button to enter the Copy Camera interface, as shown in Figure 15-2.
239
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 15-2 Copy Settings to Other Cameras
2) Select the camera (s) to be configured with the same OSD settings. You can also check the
checkbox of Analog to select all cameras.
3) Click the OK button to finish the Copy settings and back to the OSD Configuration
interface.
Step 8 Click the Apply button to apply the settings.
15.2 Configuring Privacy Mask
Purpose
You are allowed to configure the four-sided privacy mask zones that cannot be viewed or recorded
by the operator.
Step 1 Enter the Privacy Mask Settings interface.
Menu > Camera > Privacy Mask
Step 2 Select the camera to set privacy mask.
Step 3 Check the checkbox of Enable Privacy Mask to enable this feature.
240
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 15-3 Privacy Mask Settings Interface
Step 4 Use the mouse to draw a zone on the window. The zones will be marked with different
frame colors.
Up to 4 privacy mask zones can be configured, and the size of each area can be adjusted.
Step 5 The configured privacy mask zones on the window can be cleared by clicking the
corresponding Clear Zone1-4 icons on the right side of the window, or click Clear All to
clear all zones.
Figure 15-4 Set Privacy Mask Area
Step 6 You can click the Copy button to copy the privacy mask settings of the current camera to
other cameras.
Please refer to step 7 of Chapter 15.1 Configuring OSD Settings.
Step 7 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
15.3 Configuring Video Parameters
15.3.1 Configuring Image Settings
Step 1 Enter the Image Settings interface.
Menu > Camera > Image
241
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 2 Select the Image Settings tab.
Figure 15-5 Image Settings Interface (Analog Camera)
Figure 15-6 Image Settings Interface (IP Camera)
Step 3 Select the camera to set image parameters.
Step 4 Two periods for different image settings are provided, select the period name in the
dropdown list.
The time periods cannot be overlapped with each other.
Step 5 Select the mode from the drop-down list of Mode, there are four modes selectable for the
analog cameras: Standard, Indoor, Dim Light and Outdoor.
Step 6 Adjust the image parameters according to actual needs. The parameters include Brightness,
Contrast, Saturation, Hue, Sharpness and Denoising for the analog cameras and Brightness,
242
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Contrast and Saturation for the IP cameras. You can also click Restore to set the
parameters to the default settings.
Step 7 You can click Copy to copy the image settings of the current camera to other cameras.
Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.
15.3.2 Configuring Camera Parameters Settings
This chapter is applicable to -F series DVR.
Step 1 Enter the Image Settings interface.
Menu > Camera > Image
Step 2 Select the Camera Parameters Settings tab.
Figure 15-7 Camera Parameters Settings
Step 3 Select the Camera from the dropdown list.
Step 4 (Optional) Switch the 4 MP or 5 MP signal from the Signal Switch dropdown list. 4 MP 25/30
fps and 5 MP 20 fps are selectable. The 4 MP 25 fps and 4 MP 30 fps signals are
self-adaptive for the camera.
Step 5 (Optional) Check the checkbox of Enable Defog to enable the defog function of the selected
camera. And set the Defog Level from 1 to 4.
Step 6 (Optional) Adjust the other camera parameters including Day to Night Sensitivity, Night to
Day Sensitivity and IR Light Brightness for the analog cameras. You can also click Default to
set the parameters to the default settings.
243
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 7 (Optional) Click Copy to copy the parameters of the current camera to other analog
cameras.
Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.






The camera parameters settings is only applicable for ananlog cameras.
The 4 MP/5 MP Signal Switch, Defog, Day to Night Sensitivity, Night to Day Sensitivity and IR
Light Brightness functions must be supported by the connected analog camera. You cannot
set the parameters if the connected analog camera does not support them or there is no
video signal.
The parameters are saved to the connected analog camera and are not saved to the DVR.
The default value of Day to Night Sensitivity, Night to Day Sensitivity and IR Light Brightness
is 5. The effective value ranges from 1 to 9.
If you exit from the interface and enter it again, the parameters displayed are those you
have set the last time.
The DVR connects to the analog camera via coaxitron and there is no response mechanism.
Even if the coaxitron is abnormal, the parameters are still displayed to be set successfully.
244
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 16 DVR Management and Maintenance
16.1 Viewing System Information
Step 1 Enter the System Information interface.
Menu > Maintenance > System Info
Step 2 You can click the Device Info, Camera, Record, Alarm, Network and HDD tabs to view the
system information of the device.
Figure 16-1 System Information Interface


This alarm information is not available for the DS-7100 and DS-7200HGHI series.
You can view the hardware version in the Device Information interface.
16.2 Searching Log Files
Purpose
The operation, alarm, exception and information of the DVR can be stored in log files, which can
be viewed and exported at any time.
Step 1 Enter the Log Search interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Log Information
245
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 16-2 Log Search Interface
Step 2 Set the log search conditions to refine your search, including the Start Time, End Time,
Major Type and Minor Type.
Step 3 Click the Search button to start search log files.
Step 4 The matched log files will be displayed on the list shown below.
Up to 2000 log files can be displayed each time.
Figure 16-3 Log Search Results
Step 5 You can click the
button of each log or double-click it to view its detailed information.
And you can also click the
button to view the related video files if available.
246
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 16-4 Log Information Interface
Step 6 If you want to export the log files, click the Export button to enter the Export menu, as
shown in Figure 16-5.
Figure 16-5 Export Log Files
Step 7 Select the backup device from the dropdown list of Device Name.
Step 8 Click the Export to export the log files to the selected backup device.
You can click the New Folder button to create new folder in the backup device, or click the
Format button to format the backup device before log export.


Please connect the backup device to DVR before operating log export.
The log files exported to the backup device are named by exporting time, e.g.,
20110514124841logBack.txt.
247
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
16.3 Importing/Exporting IP Camera Info
Purpose
The information of added IP camera can be generated into an excel file and exported to the local
device for backup, including the IP address, manage port, password of admin, etc. And the
exported file can be edited on your PC, like adding or deleting the content, and copy the setting to
other devices by importing the excel file to it.
Step 1 Enter the camera management interface.
Menu > Camera > Camera
Click the IP Camera Import/Export tab, the content of detected plugged external device
appears.
Step 2 Click the Export button to export configuration files to the selected local backup device.
Step 3 To import a configuration file, select the file from the selected backup device and click the
Import button. After the importing process is completed, you must reboot the DVR.
16.4 Importing/Exporting Configuration Files
Purpose
The configuration files of the DVR can be exported to local device for backup; and the
configuration files of one DVR can be imported to multiple DVR devices if they are to be
configured with the same parameters.
Step 1 Enter the Import/Export Configuration File interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Import/Export
Figure 16-6 Import/Export Configuration File
248
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 2 Click the Export button to export configuration files to the selected local backup device.
Step 3 To import a configuration file, select the file from the selected backup device and click the
Import button. After the import process is completed, you must reboot the DVR.
After having finished the import of configuration files, the device will reboot automatically.
16.5 Upgrading System
Purpose
The firmware on your DVR can be upgraded by local backup device or remote FTP server.
16.5.1 Upgrading by Local Backup Device
Step 1 Connect your DVR with a local backup device where the update firmware file is located.
Step 2 Enter the Upgrade interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade
Step 3 Click the Local Upgrade tab to enter the Local Upgrade interface, as shown in Figure 16-7.
Figure 16-7 Local Upgrade Interface
Step 4 Select the update file from the backup device.
Step 5 Click the Upgrade button to start upgrading.
Step 6 After the upgrading is completed, reboot the DVR to activate the new firmware.
16.5.2 Upgrading by FTP
Before you start
Configure PC (running FTP server) and DVR to the same Local Area Network. Run the 3rd-party
TFTP software on the PC and copy the firmware into the root directory of TFTP.
Step 1 Enter the Upgrade interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Upgrade
Step 2 Click the FTP tab to enter the Local Upgrade interface, as shown in Figure 16-8.
249
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 16-8 FTP Upgrade Interface
Step 3 Enter the FTP Server Address in the text field.
Step 4 Click the Upgrade button to start upgrading.
Step 5 After the upgrading is completed, reboot the DVR to activate the new firmware.
16.6 Upgrading Camera
Purpose
You can upgrade multiple connected analog cameras supporting Turbo HD or AHD signal
simultaneously with DVR.
This chapter is applicable to the DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR.
Step 1 Enter the Camera Upgrade interface.
Figure 16-9 Camera Upgrade
Step 2 Check the checkbox(es) of the analog camera(s) for upgrading.
The analog camera must support Turbo HD or AHD signal.
Step 3 Select the update file from the backup device.
Step 4 Click the Upgrade button to start upgrading.
16.7 Restoring Default Settings
Step 1 Enter the Default interface.
Menu > Maintenance > Default
250
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 16-10 Restore Defaults
Step 2 Select the restoring type from the following three options.
Restore Defaults: Restore all parameters, except the network (including IP address, subnet
mask, gateway, MTU, NIC working mode, default route, server port, etc.) and user account
parameters, to the factory default settings.
Factory Defaults: Restore all parameters to the factory default settings.
Restore to Inactive: Restore the device to the inactive status.
Step 3 Click the OK button to restore the default settings.
The device will reboot automatically after restoring to the default settings.
251
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 17 Others
17.1 Configuring General Settings
Purpose
You can configure the output resolution, system time, mouse pointer speed, etc.
Step 1 Enter the General Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > General
Step 2 Select the General tab.
Figure 17-1 General Settings Interface (for DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N Series)
Figure 17-2 General Settings Interface (for Simultaneous VGA and HDMI Output)
252
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 17-3 General Settings Interface (for Independent VGA and HDMI Output)
Step 3 Configure the following settings:
 Language: The default language used is English.
 Output Standard: Select the output standard to be PAL or NTSC.
 VGA/HDMI Resolution: Select the output resolution, which must be the same with the
resolution of the VGA/HDMI display.


For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, VGA/HDMI1 Resolution and HDMI2 Resolution
can be configured separately. Up to 1920 × 1080/60 Hz resolution is supported for
VGA/HDMI1 output and up to 4K (3840 × 2160)/30 Hz resolution is supported for HDMI2
output.
For DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR, the HDMI and VGA
interfaces can be configured to be simultaneous or independent (Refer to Chapter 17.4
Configuring More Settings for reference). If you have configured HDMI/VGA simultaneous
output, you can set the VGA/HDMI Resolution. If you have configured independent HDMI
and VGA output, you can set the VGA Resolution and HDMI Resolution independently. Up
to 1920 × 1080/60 Hz resolution is supported for VGA output and up to 4K (3840 × 2160)/30
Hz resolution is supported for HDMI output.
 Time Zone: Select the time zone.
 Date Format: Select the date format.
 System Date: Select the system date.
 System Time: Select the system time.
 Mouse Pointer Speed: Set the speed of mouse pointer; 4 levels are configurable.
 Enable Wizard: Enable/disable the Wizard when the device starts up.
 Enable Password: Enable/disable the use of the login password.
253
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
For -F series DVR, if you check the checkbox of Enable Password, every time when you log in to the
DVR, the Unlock Pattern interface will pop up. If you uncheck the checkbox of Enable Password,
when you log in to the DVR, the Unlock Pattern interface will not pop up.
Step 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
17.2 Configuring RS-232 Serial Port
The RS-232 serial port is supported by DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N
series DVR.
Purpose
The RS-232 port can be used in two ways:
 Parameters Configuration: Connect a PC to the DVR through the PC serial port. Device
parameters can be configured by using software such as HyperTerminal. The serial port
parameters must be the same as the NVR’s when connecting with the PC serial port.
 Transparent Channel: Connect a serial device directly to the DVR. The serial device will be
controlled remotely by the PC through the network and the protocol of the serial device.
Step 1 Enter the RS-232 Settings interface.
Menu >Configuration> RS-232
Figure 17-4 RS-232 Settings Interface
Step 2 Configure RS-232 parameters, including baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, flow control
and usage.
Step 3 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
17.3 Configuring DST Settings
Step 1 Enter the General Settings interface.
Menu >Configuration>General
Step 2 Choose DST Settings tab.
254
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 17-5 DST Settings Interface
You can check the checkbox before the Auto DST Adjustment item.
Or you can manually check the Enable DST checkbox, and then you choose the date of the
DST period.
17.4 Configuring More Settings
Step 1 Enter the General Settings interface.
Menu > Configuration > General
Step 2 Click the More Settings tab to enter the More Settings interface, as shown in the following
figures.
Figure 17-6 More Settings Interface (1)
Figure 17-7 More Settings Interface (2)
Figure 17-8 More Settings Interface (3)
255
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 17-9 More Settings Interface (4)
Step 3 Configure the following settings:
 Device Name: Edit the name of DVR.
 Device No.: Edit the serial number of DVR. The Device No. can be set in the range of 1 to
255, and the default No. is 255.
 Auto Logout: Set timeout time for menu inactivity. E.g., when the timeout time is set to 5
Minutes, then the system will exit from the current operation menu to live view screen
after 5 minutes of menu inactivity.
 CVBS Output Brightness: Adjust the video output brightness via the CVBS interface.
The CVBS Output is provided for the DS-7200/7300/8100HQHI-F/N and
DS-7200/7600/7300/8100/9000HUHI series DVR only.
 Enable HDMI/VGA Simultaneous Output: For DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and
DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR, the HDMI and VGA interfaces can be configured to be
simultaneous or independent. You can check the checkbox to enable HDMI/VGA
simultaneous output or uncheck it to remain independent output of HDMI and VGA
interfaces.
 Menu Output Mode: You can choose the menu display on different video output.



For DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR, if you have configured
HDMI/VGA simultaneous output, you can select Auto and HDMI/VGA for the menu output
mode. If you have configured independent HDMI and VGA output, you can select Auto,
HDMI and VGA for the menu output mode.
For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series, Auto, HDMI1/VGA, and HDMI2 are selectable.
For HGHI-F/N, HGHI-F, DS-7104/7108/7204/7208HQHI-F/N and DS-7200/7604HUHI series
DVR, Auto and HDMI/VGA are selectable.
 Encoding Mode: For DS-7100/7200HGHI-E series DVR, you can select the encoding mode.
When the non-real-time mode is selected, the max. frame rate (Menu>Record>Parameters)
can be set to 15 fps only.
 Main CVBS Scaling: You can check the checkbox to enable main CVBS scaling.
256
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
 Enhanced VCA Mode: For DS-7208/7216HUHI-F/N and DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR, the
enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input. You can
enable or disable VCA mode.
Enable Enhanced VCA Mode
1) Check the checkbox to enable enhanced VCA mode.
2) Click Apply and the attention box pops up as below.
Figure 17-10 Enable Enhanced VCA Mode (1)
Figure 17-11 Enable Enhanced VCA Mode (2)
3) Click Yes to apply the function and reboot the device.
Disable Enhanced VCA Mode
1) Uncheck the checkbox to disable enhanced VCA mode.
2) Click Apply and the attention box pops up as below.
Figure 17-12 Disable Enhanced VCA Mode (1)
257
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 17-13 Disable Enhanced VCA Mode (2)
3) Click Yes to apply the function and reboot the device.
If you have configured 2K/4K output, or connected 4 MP/5 MP signal input already, when you
enable enhanced VCA mode and after the device reboots, the output resolution will decrease to
1080p, and the 4 MP/5 MP signal input will display no video.
Step 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings.
17.5 Managing User Accounts
Purpose
There is a default account in the DVR: Administrator. The Administrator user name is admin and
the password is set when you start the device for the first time. The Administrator has the
permission to add and delete user and configure user parameters.
17.5.1 Adding a User
Step 1 Enter the User Management interface.
Menu >Configuration>User
Figure 17-14 User Management Interface
Step 2 Click the Add button to enter the Add User interface.
258
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 17-15 Add User Menu
Step 3 Enter the information for new user, including User Name, Password, Confirm, Level and
User’s MAC Address.
Password: Set the password for the user account.
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of
your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following
categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters.) in order to
increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly,
especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect
your product.
Level: Set the user level to Operator or Guest. Different user levels have different operating
permission.
 Operator: The Operator user level has permission of Two-way Audio in Remote
Configuration and all operating permission in Camera Configuration by default.
 Guest: The Guest user has no permission of Two-way Audio in Remote Configuration and
only has the local/remote playback in the Camera Configuration by default.
User’s MAC Address: The MAC address of the remote PC which logs onto the DVR. If it is
configured and enabled, it only allows the remote user with this MAC address to access the
DVR.
Step 4 Click the OK button to save the settings and go back to the User Management interface.
The added new user will be displayed on the list, as shown in Figure 17-16.
259
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 17-16 Added User Listed in User Management Interface
Step 5 You can assign permissions for the added user.
1) Select the user from the list and then click
as shown in Figure 17-17.
to enter the Permission Settings interface,
Figure 17-17 User Permission Settings Interface
2) Set the operating permission of Local Configuration, Remote Configuration and Camera
Configuration for the user.
Local Configuration
 Local Log Search: Searching and viewing logs and system information of device.
 Local Parameters Settings: Configuring parameters, restoring factory default
parameters and importing/exporting configuration files.
 Local Camera Management: Enabling and disabling analog camera (s). Adding,
deleting and editing of network camera (s). This function is supported by HDVR
series.
 Local Advanced Operation: Operating HDD management (initializing HDD, setting
HDD property), upgrading system firmware.
 Local Shutdown /Reboot: Shutting down or rebooting the device.
Remote Configuration
260
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
 Remote Log Search: Remotely viewing logs that are saved on the device.
 Remote Parameters Settings: Remotely configuring parameters, restoring factory
default parameters and importing/exporting configuration files.
 Remote Camera Management: Remotely enabling and disabling analog camera (s),
and adding, deleting and editing of network camera (s). This function is supported by
HDVR series.
 Remote Serial Port Control: Configuring settings for RS-485 port.
 Remote Video Output Control: Sending remote control panel signal.
 Two-way Audio: Realizing two-way radio between the remote client and the device.
 Remote Alarm Control: Remotely arming (notify alarm and exception message to the
remote client) and controlling the alarm output.
 Remote Advanced Operation: Remotely operating HDD management (initializing HDD,
setting HDD property), upgrading system firmware.
 Remote Shutdown/Reboot: Remotely shutting down or rebooting the device.
Camera Configuration
 Remote Live View: Remotely viewing live video of the selected camera (s).
 Local Manual Operation: Locally starting/stopping manual recording, picture
capturing and alarm output of the selected camera (s).
 Remote Manual Operation: Remotely starting/stopping manual recording, picture
capturing and alarm output of the selected camera (s).
 Local Playback: Locally playing back recorded files of the selected camera (s).
 Remote Playback: Remotely playing back recorded files of the selected camera (s).
 Local PTZ Control: Locally controlling PTZ movement of the selected camera (s).
 Remote PTZ Control: Remotely controlling PTZ movement of the selected camera (s).
 Local Video Export: Locally exporting recorded files of the selected camera (s).
Local Camera Management is provided for the IP cameras only.
3) Click OK to save the settings and exit.
17.5.2 Deleting a User
Step 1 Enter the User Management interface.
Menu >Configuration>User
Step 2 Select the user to be deleted from the list, as shown in Figure 17-18.
261
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Figure 17-18 User List
Step 3 Click
to delete the selected user account.
17.5.3 Editing a User
Purpose
For the added user accounts, you can edit the parameters.
Step 1 Enter the User Management interface.
Menu >Configuration>User
Step 2 Select the user to be edited from the list, as shown in Figure 17-18.
Step 3 Click the
icon to enter the Edit User interface, as shown in Figure 17-19.
Figure 17-19 Edit User Interface
Step 4 Edit the corresponding parameters.
 Operator and Guest
You can edit the user information, including user name, password, permission level and
MAC address. Check the checkbox of Change Password if you want to change the password,
and input the new password in the text field of Password and Confirm. A strong password
is recommended.
262
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
 Admin
You are only allowed to edit the password and MAC address. Check the checkbox of
Change Password if you want to change the password, and input the correct old password,
and the new password in the text field of Password and Confirm.
STRONG PASSWORD RECOMMENDED-We highly recommend you create a strong password of
your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following
categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters.) in order to
increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly,
especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect
your product.
Hold the
icon and you can see the clear text of the password. Release the mouse and the
content of the password restores invisible.
Step 5 Edit the unlock pattern for the admin user account.
1) Check the checkbox of Enable Unlock Pattern to enable the use of unlock pattern when
logging in to the device.
2) Use the mouse to draw a pattern among the 9 dots on the screen. Release the mouse
when the pattern is done.
3) Confirm the pattern again with the mouse.
Please refer to Chapter 2.3.1 Configuring the Unlock Pattern for detailed instructions.
Figure 17-20 Set Unlock Patter for Admin User
Step 6 (Optional) Click
icon after Draw Unlock Pattern to modify the pattern.
263
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Step 7 (Optional) Click
icon after Export GUID to pop up the Reset Password interface. Click
Export button to export GUID to the USB flash disk for retrieving the forgotten password.
Then a GUID file will be saved in the USB flash disk.
Figure 17-21 Export GUID
You must input the correct old password of the admin before exporting GUID.
Step 8 Click the OK button to save the settings and exit from the menu.
Step 9 (Optional) For the Operator or Guest user account, you can also click the
the User Management interface to edit the permission.
264
button on
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Chapter 18 Appendix
18.1 Specifications
18.1.1 DS-7100HGHI-E1
Model
DS-7104HGHI-E1
Video
compression
Analog and
Turbo HD
video input
Video/
Audio input
DS-7108HGHI-E1
DS-7116HGHI-E1
8-ch
16-ch
H.264
4-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Supported
camera types
720p25, 720p30, CVBS
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
HDMI/VGA
output
1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
Video/
Main stream: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Audio output
Sub-stream:
Frame rate
Sub-stream:
2CIF@6fps;
4CIF/2CIF@6fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25
fps (P)/30fps (N)
265
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Network
management
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
8-ch
Remote
connections
32
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network
interface
1, 10M/100M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
16-ch
Hard disk
External
interface
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
≤8W
≤ 12 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
200 × 200 × 45 mm (7.9 × 7.9 × 1.8 inch)
266
≤ 20 W
285 × 210 × 45 mm
(11.2 × 8.3 × 1.8
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
inch)
≤ 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
≤ 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Each two video channels are grouped in sequence, e.g., CH01 and CH02, CH03 and CH04...; and
each two channels in the same group must be connected with the same type of video source
(Turbo HD or CVBS). The above information is for reference only. Please refer to the specific
configuration of the device.
267
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.2 DS-7200HGHI-E1
Model
DS-7204HGHI-E1
Video
compression
Analog and
Turbo HD video
input
Video/
Supported
camera types
Audio input
IP video input
DS-7208HGHI-E1
DS-7216HGHI-E1
8-ch
16-ch
H.264
4-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron
connection
720p25, 720p30, CVBS
1-ch
2-ch
Up to 720p
resolution
Up to 1080p resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
HDMI/VGA
output
1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024
× 768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
Main stream: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
Frame rate
Video/
2CIF@6fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@
25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Audio output
Sub-stream:
4CIF/2CIF@6fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
4-ch
8-ch
268
16-ch
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
playback
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
Remote
connections
32
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network
interface
1, 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
2 × USB2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
128
≤8W
≤ 12 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55ºC (14 ºF to 131ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
≤ 20 W
260 × 222 × 45 mm (10.2 × 8.7 × 1.8 inch)
≤ 1 kg (2.2 lb)
≤ 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Each two video channels are grouped in sequence, e.g., CH01 and CH02, CH03 and CH04...; and
each two channels in the same group must be connected with the same type of video source
(Turbo HD or CVBS). The above information is for reference only. Please refer to the specific
configuration of the device.
269
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.3 DS-7200HGHI-E2
Model
DS-7208HGHI-E2
Video compression
DS-7216HGHI- E2
H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog and Turbo
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron
HD video input
connection
Video/
Supported
types
camera
Audio input
IP video input
720p25, 720p30, CVBS
2-ch
Up to 1080p resolution
Audio compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way
audio in
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
HDMI/VGA output
1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
Encoding resolution
720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
Main stream: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps
(N)
Frame rate
Sub-stream:
4CIF/2CIF@6fps;
Video/
Audio output
Network
management
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
8-ch
Remote connections
128
Network protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP,
16-ch
270
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
SADP, SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
Hard disk
External
interface
SATA
2 SATA interfaces
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network interface
1, 10M/100M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
≤ 12 W
≤ 20 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
380 × 320 × 48 mm (14.9 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
Each two video channels are grouped in sequence, e.g., CH01 and CH02, CH03 and CH04...; and
each two channels in the same group must be connected with the same type of video source
(Turbo HD or CVBS). The above information is for reference only. Please refer to the specific
configuration of the device.
271
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.4 DS-7100HGHI-F1
Model
DS-7104HGHI-F1
Video
compression
DS-7108HGHI-F1
DS-7116HGHI-F1
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD
1080P25, 1080P30, 720p25, 720p30
AHD input
720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-w
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
ay
audio
input
HDMI/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Encoding
resolution
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
Video/Audio
output
For 720p stream access: 720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps
(P)/30fps (N)
Frame rate
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
Sub-stream:
2CIF@6fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@
25fps (P)/30fps (N)
4CIF/2CIF@6fps;
272
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
8-ch
Remote
connections
32
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
Rear panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
16-ch
Consumption
(without
HDD)
General
≤8W
≤ 12 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
≤ 20 W
200 × 200 × 45 mm (7.9 × 7.9 × 1.8 inch)
285 × 210 × 45 mm
(11.2 × 8.3 × 1.8
inch)
≤ 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
≤ 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Weight
(without
HDD)
273
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.5 DS-7200HGHI-F1
Model
DS-7204HGHI-F1
Video
compression
Analog
input
Video/Audio
input
DS-7208HGHI-F1
DS-7216HGHI-F1
8-ch
16-ch
H.264+/H.264
video 4-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo HD input
1080P25, 1080P30, 720p25, 720p30
AHD input
720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
1-ch
2-ch
Up to 960p
resolution
Up to 1080p resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
HDMI/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled: 720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
Video/Audio
output
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
For 720p stream access:
720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Frame rate
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
Sub-stream:
2CIF@6fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@
4CIF/2CIF@6fps;
274
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
8-ch
Remote
connections
32
128
Network
management Network
protocols
Hard disk
External
interface
16-ch
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network
interface
1, RJ-45 10M/100M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
Rear panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
≤8W
≤ 12 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
≤ 20 W
260 × 222 × 45 mm (10.2 × 8.7 × 1.8 inch)
≤ 1 kg (2.2 lb)
≤ 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
275
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.6 DS-7200HGHI-F2
Model
DS-7208HGHI-F2
Video compression
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
Video/Audio
input
DS-7216HGHI- F2
16-ch
Analog video input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron
connection
Turbo HD input
1080P25, 1080P30, 720p25, 720p30
AHD input
720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
2-ch
Up to 1080p resolution
Audio compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
HDMI/VGA output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
Encoding
resolution
720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
Video/Audio
output
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
For 720p stream access:
Frame rate
720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
4CIF/2CIF@6fps; CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N);
276
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
8-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP,
SADP, SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
2 SATA interfaces
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
Rear panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
16-ch
≤ 12 W
≤ 20 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
380 × 320 × 48 mm (14.9 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
277
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.7 DS-7100HQHI-F1/N
DS-7104HQHI-F1
/N
Model
Video
compression
Analog video
input
DS-7108HQHI-F1 DS-7116HQHI-F1/
/N
N
H.264+/H.264
4-ch
8-ch
16-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for the first channel
of DS-7104HQHI-F1/N, the first 2 channels of
DS-7108HQHI-F1/N, and the first 4 channels of
DS-7116HQHI-F1/N.
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input/
Two-way
audio input
Video/Audio
output
HDMI/VGA
output
Encoding
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)、
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 ×
1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
278
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K
(3840 × 2160)/30Hz,
2K (2560 ×
1440)/60Hz, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
VGA: 1-ch, 2K (2560
× 1440)/60Hz, 1920
× 1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
Main stream:
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
For 3 MP stream access:
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@12fps
For 1080p stream access: 1080p/720p@12fps;
VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Frame rate
For 720p stream access:
720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF/2CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive
Ethernet interface
8-ch
279
16-ch
1, RJ45
10M/100/1000Mbps
self-adaptive
Ethernet interface
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
≤8W
≤ 12 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
≤ 20 W
200 × 200 × 45 mm (7.9 × 7.9 × 1.8 inch)
285 × 210 × 45 mm
(11.2 × 8.3 × 1.8
inch)
≤ 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
≤ 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
280
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.8 DS-7200HQHI-F1/N
Model
DS-7204HQHI-F1/N DS-7208HQHI-F1/N DS-7216HQHI-F1/N
Video
compression
Analog
input
H.264+/H.264
video 4-ch
8-ch
16-ch
BNC interface (1.0Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for the first channel of
DS-7204HQHI-F1/N, the first 2 channels of DS-7208HQHI-F1/N, and the
first 4 channels of DS-7216HQHI-F1/N.
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
Audio
compression
1-ch
2-ch
Up to 1080p resolution
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way 1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
audio input
Video/Audio
output
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
HDMI/VGA
output
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840
× 2160)/30Hz, 2K
(2560 × 1440)/60Hz,
1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz,
1280 × 720/60Hz,
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
VGA: 1-ch, 2K (2560 ×
1440)/60Hz, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
281
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7204HQHI-F1/N DS-7208HQHI-F1/N DS-7216HQHI-F1/N
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
Main stream:
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
For 3 MP stream access:
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@12fps
For 1080p stream access: 1080p/720p@12fps;
VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Frame rate
For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF/2CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
management Network
protocols
Hard disk
8-ch
16-ch
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI,
UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
282
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7204HQHI-F1/N DS-7208HQHI-F1/N DS-7216HQHI-F1/N
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M self-adaptive Ethernet
interface
External
interface
2 × USB 2.0
Serial interface
RS-485 (half-duplex)
Power supply
12 VDC
(without HDD)
General
Front panel: 1 × USB
2.0
USB interface
Consumption
Rear panel: 1 × USB
3.0
≤ 15 W
≤ 20 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
1, RJ45
10M/100M/1000M
self-adaptive Ethernet
interface
≤ 30 W
315 × 242 × 45 mm (12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
283
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.9 DS-7200HQHI-F2/N
Model
DS-7208HQHI-F2/N
Video
compression
Analog
input
video
DS-7216HQHI-F2/N
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron
connection
3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60
Video/Audio
input
Turbo HD input
Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for the first 2
channels of DS-7208HQHI-F2/N, and the first 4 channels of
DS-7216HQHI-F2/N.
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
Video/Audio
output
2-ch
Up to 1080p resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC:
704 × 480
HDMI/VGA
output
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 ×
2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 ×
1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60 Hz, 1280 Hz, 1280 × 1024/60 Hz, 1280 ×
× 1024/60 Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60 Hz
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60 Hz
VGA: 1-ch, 2K (2560 ×
1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60
Hz, 1280 × 1024/60 Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60 Hz
284
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7208HQHI-F2/N
DS-7216HQHI-F2/N
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
Main stream:
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
For 3 MP stream access:
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@12fps
For 1080p stream access: 1080p/720p@12fps;
VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Frame rate
For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps
(P)/30fps (N)
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF/2CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Network
management
Hard disk
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
8-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
2 SATA interfaces
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
16-ch
285
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
External
interface
DS-7208HQHI-F2/N
DS-7216HQHI-F2/N
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M
self-adaptive Ethernet
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M
self-adaptive Ethernet
interface
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
Serial interface
RS-485 (half-duplex)
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
≤ 20 W
≤ 30 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
286
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.10 DS-7100HGHI-F1/N
DS-7104HGHI-F1 DS-7108HGHI-F1
/N
/N
Model
Video
compression
Analog
input
DS-7116HGHI-F1
/N
H.264+/H.264
video 4-ch
8-ch
16-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo HD input
720p25, 720p30
Video/
AHD input
720p25, 720p30
Audio input
HDCVI input
720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
HDMI/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
For 720p stream access:
720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA@12fps;
Video/
Audio output
Frame rate
CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
For SD stream access:
WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
287
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
8-ch
Remote
connections
32
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
≤8W
≤ 12 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
16-ch
≤ 20 W
200 × 200 × 45 mm (7.9 × 7.9 × 1.8 inch)
285 × 210 × 45 mm
(11.2 × 8.3 × 1.8
inch)
≤ 0.8 kg (1.8 lb)
≤ 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
288
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.11 DS-7200HGHI-F1/N
Model
DS-7204HGHI-F1/N DS-7208HGHI-F1/N
Video
compression
Analog
input
Video/Audio
input
H.264+/H.264
video 4-ch
Turbo
input
DS-7216HGHIF1/N
8-ch
16-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω)
HD
720p25, 720p30
AHD input
720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
Audio
compression
1-ch
2-ch
2-ch
Up to 960p resolution
G.711u
Audio
input/Two-way 1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
audio input
HDMI/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
For 720p stream access:
Video/Audio
output
720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA@12fps;
Frame rate
CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
For SD stream access:
WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 4 Mbps
289
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
8-ch
Remote
connections
32
128
Network
management Network
protocols
Hard disk
External
interface
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
SMTP, NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Network
interface
1, RJ-45 10M/100Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
Rear panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
(without HDD)
General
16-ch
≤8W
≤ 12 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
≤ 20 W
260 × 222 × 45 mm (10.2 × 8.7 × 1.8 inch)
≤ 1 kg (2.2 lb)
≤ 1 kg (2.2 lb)
290
≤ 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.12 DS-7200HUHI-F1/N
Model
DS-7204HUHI-F1/N
Video
compression
Analog
input
Video/Audio
input
video
DS-7208HUHI-F1/N
H.264+/H.264
4-ch
8-ch
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron
connection
Turbo HD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60, 3 MP
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
2-ch
Up to 4 MP resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input
4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC:
704 × 480
HDMI/VGA
output
Video/Audio
output
Encoding
resolution
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60
Hz
VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 ×
2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 ×
1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
Frame rate
3 MP@15fps;
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25 fps (P)/30 fps (N)
291
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7204HUHI-F1/N
DS-7208HUHI-F1/N
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Network
management
Hard disk
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
8-ch
Two-way audio
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the audio input)
input
External
interface
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M
self-adaptive Ethernet
interface
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
Serial interface
RS-485 (half-duplex)
Alarm in/out
4/1
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
General
(without HDD)
Working
temperature
1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M
self-adaptive Ethernet
interface
Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
8/4
≤ 15 W
≤ 20 W
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
292
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7204HUHI-F1/N
Working
humidity
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
DS-7208HUHI-F1/N
10% to 90%
315 × 242 × 45 mm (12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)
≤ 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
293
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.13 DS-7200HUHI-F2/N
DS-7204HUHI-F2
/N
Model
Video
compression
Analog
input
Video/Audio
input
DS-7216HUHI-F2
/N
8-ch
16-ch
H.264+/H.264
video 4-ch
Turbo
input
DS-7208HUHI-F2
/N
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
HD
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60, 3 MP
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
2-ch
Up to 4 MP resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input
4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704
× 480
VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
HDMI/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280
× 1024/60Hz,
1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60 Hz
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Video/Audio
output
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K
(2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024
× 768/60Hz
Main stream:
Frame rate
3 MP@15fps;
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25 fps (P)/30 fps (N)
294
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-7204HUHI-F2
/N
Model
DS-7208HUHI-F2
/N
DS-7216HUHI-F2
/N
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
2 SATA interfaces
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the audio input)
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M
self-adaptive
Ethernet interface
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
8-ch
16-ch
1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive
Ethernet interface
Front panel: 1× USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1×USB 3.0
Serial interface RS-485 (half-duplex)
Alarm in/out
4/1
Power supply
12 VDC
Consumption
General
(without HDD)
Working
temperature
≤ 15 W
8/4
16/4
≤ 20 W
≤ 25 W
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
295
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-7204HUHI-F2
/N
Model
Working
humidity
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
DS-7208HUHI-F2
/N
DS-7216HUHI-F2
/N
10% to 90%
380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
≤ 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
296
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.14 DS-7200HUHI-F1/S
Model
DS-7204HUHI-F1/S
Video
compression
DS-7208HUHI-F1/S
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD 5 MP20, 5 MP15, 4 MP25, 4 MP30, 3 MP18, 1080p30, 1080p25,
720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25, NTSC, PAL
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p60, 720p50, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
2-ch
Up to 4 MP resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input
4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 ×
480
VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
HDMI/VGA
output
Video/Audio
output
Encoding
resolution
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280
×
1024/60Hz,
1280
× HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 ×
2160)/30Hz,
2K
(2560
×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
Frame rate
5 MP@10fps/4 MP@15fps/3 MP@15fps
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
297
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12 fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate 32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate 64 Kbps
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
Dual stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS,
iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1st audio input)
Network
interface
1,
RJ45
self-adaptive
interface
8-ch
10M/100M
1,
RJ45
10M/100M/1000M
Ethernet
self-adaptive Ethernet interface
Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0
USB interface 2 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
Serial
interface
RS-485 (half-duplex)
Alarm in/out
4/1
Power supply
12 VDC
8/4
Consumption
General
(without
HDD)
Working
temperature
≤ 15 W
≤ 20 W
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
298
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Working
humidity
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
10% to 90%
315 × 242 × 45 mm (12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8 inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
299
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.15 DS-7200HUHI-F2/S
Model
DS-7204HUHI-F2/S DS-7208HUHI-F2/S DS-7216HUHI-F2/S
Video
compression
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD 5 MP20, 5 MP15, 4 MP25, 4 MP30, 3 MP18, 1080p30, 1080p25,
720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25, NTSC, PAL
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p60, 720p50, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP
input
video 2-ch
Up to 4 MP resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input
4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 ×
480
HDMI/VGA
output
VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
1-ch,
1920
× 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 × 768/60Hz
1024/60Hz, 1280 × HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560
720/60Hz, 1024 × × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
768/60Hz
1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
5 MP/4 MP/3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Video/Audio
output
Main stream:
Frame rate
5 MP@10fps/4 MP@15fps/3 MP@15fps
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
300
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12 fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video
rate
bit
32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output 1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio
rate
Network
managemen
t
Hard disk
External
interface
General
bit
64 Kbps
Dual stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS,
iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
2 SATA interfaces
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the 1st audio input)
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M
1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M
self-adaptive
Ethernet interface
Ethernet interface
USB
interface
2 × USB 2.0
Serial
interface
RS-485 (half-duplex)
Alarm in/out
4/1
Power
supply
12 VDC
8-ch
16-ch
Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
8/4
16/4
≤ 20 W
≤ 25 W
Consumption
(without
HDD)
≤ 15 W
301
self-adaptive
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
380 × 320 × 48 mm (15.0 × 12.6 × 1.9 inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
302
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.16 DS-7600HUHI-F/N
DS-7604HUHI-F1/
N
Model
Video
compression
DS-7608HUHI-F2
/N
DS-7616HUHI-F2
/N
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD
AHD input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
HDCVI input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
CVBS input
Support
IP video input
Video/Audio
output
3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25
4-ch (up to 8-ch)
8-ch (up to 16-ch)
16-ch (up to 32-ch)
Up to 8 MP resolution
144 Mbps
Network
Bandwidth
96 Mbps
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input
4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704
× 480
128 Mbps
VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
HDMI/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 ×
1024/60Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
3MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
303
(incoming: 76
Mbps)
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K
(2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-7604HUHI-F1/
N
Model
DS-7608HUHI-F2
/N
DS-7616HUHI-F2
/N
Main stream:
3MP@15fps;
Frame rate
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video bit rate 32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output
1-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate 64 Kbps
Network
management
Hard disk
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS,
iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
1 SATA interface
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk.
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (using the audio input)
Network
interface
1, RJ45
10M/100Mbps
self-adaptive
Ethernet interface
USB interface
2 × USB 2.0
Serial
interface
RS-485 (half-duplex)
Alarm in/out
4/1
External
interface
8-ch
16-ch
2 SATA interfaces
1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000Mbps
self-adaptive Ethernet interface
Front panel: 1 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
8/4
304
16/4
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-7604HUHI-F1/
N
Model
Power supply
DS-7608HUHI-F2
/N
DS-7616HUHI-F2
/N
≤ 20 W
≤ 40 W
12 VDC
Consumption
(without
HDD)
General
≤ 15 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
315 × 242 × 45 mm
380 × 320 × 48 mm
(12.4 × 9.5 × 1.8
(14.9× 12.6 × 1.9 inch )
inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 2 kg (4.4 lb)
305
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.17 DS-7300HUHI-F4/N
Model
DS-7304HUHI-F4/N DS-7308HUHI-F4/N DS-7316HUHI-F4/N
Video
compression
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60, 3 MP
AHD input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
HDCVI input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
CVBS input
Support
2-ch (up to 6-ch)
IP video
input
2-ch (up to 10-ch)
2-ch (up to 18-ch)
Up to 8 MP resolution
H.265/H.264+/H.264
Video/Audio
output
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input
4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
HDMI1/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
HDMI2
output
1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60
Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
3MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
3MP@15fps;
Frame rate
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
306
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7304HUHI-F4/N DS-7308HUHI-F4/N DS-7316HUHI-F4/N
Video
rate
bit
32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output 2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio
rate
bit
Dual stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
management Network
protocols
Hard disk
External
interface
General
64 Kbps
8-ch
16-ch
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI,
UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP
SATA
4 SATA interfaces
eSATA
Support
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk.
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
Network
interface
2, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB
interface
Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
Serial
interface
RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
Alarm in/out
16/4
Power
supply
100 to 240 VAC
Consumption
(without
HDD)
≤ 35 W
≤ 45 W
307
≤ 65 W
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7304HUHI-F4/N DS-7308HUHI-F4/N DS-7316HUHI-F4/N
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
445 × 390 × 70 mm (17.5 × 15.4 × 2.8 inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 5 kg (11.0 lb)
308
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.18 DS-8100HUHI-F8/N
Model
DS-8104HUHI-F8/N DS-8108HUHI-F8/N DS-8116HUHI-F8/N
Video
compression
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60, 3 MP
AHD input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
HDCVI input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
CVBS input
Support
2-ch (up to 6-ch)
IP
input
video
2-ch (up to 10-ch)
2-ch (up to 18-ch)
8-ch
16-ch
Up to 8 MP resolution
H.265/H.264+/H.264
Audio
compression
Audio input
Video/Audio
output
G.711u
4-ch
RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
HDMI1/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
HDMI2
output
1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 × 1080/60Hz,
1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
Frame rate
3 MP@15fps;
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
309
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-8104HUHI-F8/N DS-8108HUHI-F8/N DS-8116HUHI-F8/N
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video
rate
bit
32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output 2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio
rate
bit
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
management Network
protocols
Hard disk
External
interface
General
64 Kbps
8-ch
16-ch
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI,
UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP
SATA
8 SATA interfaces
eSATA
Support
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk.
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
Network
interface
2, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB
interface
Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
Serial
interface
RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
Alarm in/out
16/4
Power
supply
100 to 240 VAC
310
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-8104HUHI-F8/N DS-8108HUHI-F8/N DS-8116HUHI-F8/N
Consumption
(without
HDD)
≤ 35 W
≤ 45 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
445 × 470 × 90 mm (17.5 × 18.5 × 3.5 inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 8 kg (17.6 lb)
311
≤ 65 W
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.19 DS-9000HUHI-F8/N
DS-9004HUHI-F8
/N
Model
Video
compression
DS-9008HUHI-F8/
N
DS-9016HUHI-F8
/N
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60, 3 MP
AHD input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
HDCVI input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
CVBS input
Support
6-ch (up to 10-ch)
IP video input
10-ch (up to 18-ch)
18-ch (up to 32-ch)
Up to 8 MP resolution
H.265/H.264+/H.264
Audio
compression
Audio input
Video/Audio
output
G.711u
4-ch
8-ch
16-ch
RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704
× 480
HDMI1/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
HDMI2
output
1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
Frame rate
3 MP@15fps;
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
312
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-9004HUHI-F8
/N
Model
DS-9008HUHI-F8/
N
DS-9016HUHI-F8
/N
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Network
management
Hard disk
External
interface
General
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output
2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS,
iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP
SATA
8 SATA interfaces
eSATA
Support
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk.
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
Network
interface
2, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
USB interface
8-ch
16-ch
Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
Serial
interface
RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
Alarm in/out
16/4
Power supply
100 to 240 VAC
Consumption
(without
HDD)
≤ 35 W
≤ 45 W
313
≤ 65 W
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
DS-9004HUHI-F8
/N
Model
DS-9008HUHI-F8/
N
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
445 × 470 × 90 mm (17.5 × 18.5 × 3.5 inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 8 kg (17.6 lb)
314
DS-9016HUHI-F8
/N
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.20 DS-9000HUHI-F16/N
Model
DS-9008HUHI-F16/N
Video
compression
Analog
input
Video/Audio
input
video
DS-9016HUHI-F16/N
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
BNC interface (1.0Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron
connection
Turbo HD input
3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p60, 720p50, 720p30, 720p25
AHD input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
HDCVI input
720p30, 720p25, 1080p25, 1080p30
CVBS input
Support
10-ch (Up to 18-ch)
IP video input
18-ch (Up to 32-ch)
Up to 8 MP resolution
H.265/ H.264+/H.264
Audio
compression
Audio input
Video/Audio
output
G.711u
8-ch
16-ch
BNC (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC:
704 × 480
HDMI1/VGA
output
1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60 Hz, 1280 × 1024/60 Hz, 1280 ×
720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60 Hz
HDMI2 output
1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 ×
768/60Hz
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF
Main stream:
Frame rate
3 MP@15 fps;
1080p/720p/WD1/4CIF/VGA/CIF@25 fps(P)/30 fps(N)
315
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF@12 fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Network
management
Hard disk
Video bit rate
32 Kbps to 10 Mbps
Audio output
2-ch, BNC (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio bit rate
64 Kbps
Dual stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
8-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
protocols
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP,
NFS, iSCSI, UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF, SNMP
SATA
16 SATA interfaces
eSATA
Support
Capacity
Up to 8 TB capacity for each disk
16-ch
Two-way audio
1-ch, BNC (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
input
Network
interface
External
interface
USB interface
2, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 2 × USB 3.0
1 RS-232 serial interface
Serial interface
1 RS-485 serial interface, full-duplex
1 RS-485 keyboard interface
General
Alarm in/out
16/8
Power supply
100 to 240 VAC
Consumption
(without HDD)
≤ 230 W
316
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
Weight
(without HDD)
442 × 477 × 146 mm (17.4 × 18.8 × 5.7 inch)
≤ 15 kg (33.1 lb)
317
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.21 DS-7300HQHI-F4/N
Model
DS-7304HQHI-F4/N DS-7308HQHI-F4/N DS-7316HQHI-F4/N
Video
compression
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for the first channel of
DS-7304HQHI-F4/N, the first 2 channels of DS-7308HQHI-F4/N, and the
first 4 channels of DS-7316HQHI-F4/N.
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP
input
video 2-ch (up to 6-ch)
2-ch (up to 10-ch)
2-ch (up to 18-ch)
Up to 4 MP resolution
Audio
compression
G.711u
Audio input
4-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
CVBS output
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
HDMI/VGA
output
Video/Audio
output
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
318
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7304HQHI-F4/N DS-7308HQHI-F4/N DS-7316HQHI-F4/N
Main stream:
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
For 3 MP stream access:
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@12fps
For 1080p stream access: 1080p/720p@12fps;
VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Frame rate
For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF/2CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video
rate
bit
32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
Audio output 2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio
rate
bit
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
management Network
protocols
Hard disk
External
interface
64 Kbps
8-ch
16-ch
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI,
UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
4 SATA interfaces
eSATA
Support
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
Network
interface
1, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
319
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-7304HQHI-F4/N DS-7308HQHI-F4/N DS-7316HQHI-F4/N
USB
interface
Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
Serial
interface
RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
Alarm in/out
16/4
Power
supply
100 to 240 VAC
Consumption
(without
HDD)
General
≤ 30 W
≤ 40 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
445 × 390 × 70 mm (17.5 × 15.4 × 2.8 inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 5 kg (11.0 lb)
320
≤ 55 W
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.1.22 DS-8100HQHI-F8/N
Model
DS-8104HQHI-F8/N DS-8108HQHI-F8/N DS-8116HQHI-F8/N
Video
compression
H.264+/H.264
8-ch
16-ch
Analog video 4-ch
input
BNC interface (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), supporting coaxitron connection
3 MP, 1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30, 720p50, 720p60
Turbo
input
Video/Audio
input
HD Note: The 3 MP signal input is only available for the first channel of
DS-8104HQHI-F8/N, the first 2 channels of DS-8108HQHI-F8/N, and the
first 4 channels of DS-8116HQHI-F8/N.
AHD input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
HDCVI input
1080p25, 1080p30, 720p25, 720p30
CVBS input
Support
IP
input
video 2-ch (up to 6-ch)
Audio
compression
Audio input
CVBS output
HDMI/VGA
output
Video/Audio
output
2-ch (up to 10-ch)
2-ch (up to 18-ch)
8-ch
16-ch
Up to 4 MP resolution
G.711u
4-ch
RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ)
1-ch, BNC (1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω), resolution: PAL: 704 × 576, NTSC: 704 × 480
HDMI: 1-ch, 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz, 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz, 1920 ×
1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz, 1024 × 768/60Hz
VGA: 1-ch, 1920 × 1080/60Hz, 1280 × 1024/60Hz, 1280 × 720/60Hz,
1024 × 768/60Hz
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
Encoding
resolution
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF;
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF
321
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-8104HQHI-F8/N DS-8108HQHI-F8/N DS-8116HQHI-F8/N
Main stream:
When 1080p Lite mode not enabled:
For 3 MP stream access:
3 MP/1080p/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@12fps
For 1080p stream access: 1080p/720p@12fps;
VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Frame rate
For 720p stream access: 720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
When 1080p Lite mode enabled:
1080p lite/720p/VGA/WD1/4CIF/CIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Sub-stream:
WD1/4CIF/2CIF@12fps;
CIF/QVGA/QCIF@25fps (P)/30fps (N)
Video
rate
bit
32 Kbps to 6 Mbps
Audio output 2-ch, RCA (Linear, 1 KΩ)
Audio
rate
bit
Dual-stream
Support
Stream type
Video, Video & Audio
Synchronous
playback
4-ch
Remote
connections
128
Network
management Network
protocols
Hard disk
External
interface
64 Kbps
8-ch
16-ch
TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, Hik Cloud P2P, DNS, DDNS, NTP, SADP, NFS, iSCSI,
UPnP™, HTTPS, ONVIF
SATA
8 SATA interfaces
eSATA
Support
Capacity
Up to 6 TB capacity for each disk
Two-way
audio input
1-ch, RCA (2.0 Vp-p, 1 KΩ) (independent)
Network
interface
2, RJ45 10M/100M/1000M self-adaptive Ethernet interface
322
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Model
DS-8104HQHI-F8/N DS-8108HQHI-F8/N DS-8116HQHI-F8/N
USB
interface
Front panel: 2 × USB 2.0
Rear panel: 1 × USB 3.0
Serial
interface
RS-232, RS-485 (full-duplex), Keyboard
Alarm in/out
16/4
Power
supply
100 to 240 VAC
Consumption
(without
HDD)
General
≤ 30 W
≤ 40 W
Working
temperature
-10 ºC to +55 ºC (14 ºF to 131 ºF)
Working
humidity
10% to 90%
Dimensions
(W × D × H)
445 × 470 × 90 mm (17.5 × 18.5 × 3.5 inch)
Weight
(without
HDD)
≤ 8 kg (17.6 lb)
323
≤ 55 W
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.2 Glossary
• Dual-Stream: Dual-stream is a technology used to record high resolution video locally while
transmitting a lower resolution stream over the network. The two streams are generated by
the DVR, with the main stream having a maximum resolution of 1080P and the sub-stream
having a maximum resolution of CIF.
• DVR: Acronym for Digital Video Recorder. A DVR is device that is able to accept video signals
from analog cameras, compress the signal and store it on its hard drives.
• HDD: Acronym for Hard Disk Drive. A storage medium which stores digitally encoded data on
platters with magnetic surfaces.
• DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a network application protocol used
by devices (DHCP clients) to obtain configuration information for operation in an Internet
Protocol network.
• HTTP: Acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. A protocol to transfer hypertext request
and information between servers and browsers over a network
• PPPoE: PPPoE, Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) frames inside Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with ADSL
services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and
in plain Metro Ethernet networks.
• DDNS: Dynamic DNS is a method, protocol, or network service that provides the capability
for a networked device, such as a router or computer system using the Internet Protocol
Suite, to notify a domain name server to change, in real time (ad-hoc) the active DNS
configuration of its configured hostnames, addresses or other information stored in DNS.
• Hybrid DVR: A hybrid DVR is a combination of a DVR and NVR.
• NTP: Acronym for Network Time Protocol. A protocol designed to synchronize the clocks of
computers over a network.
• NTSC: Acronym for National Television System Committee. NTSC is an analog television
standard used in such countries as the United States and Japan. Each frame of an NTSC
signal contains 525 scan lines at 60Hz.
• NVR: Acronym for Network Video Recorder. An NVR can be a PC-based or embedded system
used for centralized management and storage for IP cameras, IP Domes and other DVRs.
• PAL: Acronym for Phase Alternating Line. PAL is also another video standard used in
broadcast televisions systems in large parts of the world. PAL signal contains 625 scan lines
at 50Hz.
• PTZ: Acronym for Pan, Tilt, Zoom. PTZ cameras are motor driven systems that allow the
camera to pan left and right, tilt up and down and zoom in and out.
324
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
• USB: Acronym for Universal Serial Bus. USB is a plug-and-play serial bus standard to interface
devices to a host computer.
18.3 Troubleshooting
 No image displayed on the monitor after the device is starting up normally.
Possible Reasons:
— No VGA or HDMI connections.
— Connection cable is damaged.
— Input mode of the monitor is incorrect.
Step 1 Verify the device is connected with the monitor via HDMI or VGA cable.
If not, please connect the device with the monitor and reboot.
Step 2 Verify the connection cable is good.
If there is still no image display on the monitor after rebooting, please check if the
connection cable is good, and change a cable to connect again.
Step 3 Verify Input mode of the monitor is correct.
Please check the input mode of the monitor matches with the output mode of the device
(e.g. if the output mode of DVR is HDMI output, then the input mode of monitor must be
the HDMI input). And if not, please modify the input mode of monitor.
Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the step 1 to step 3.
If it is solved, finish the process.
If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.
 There is a beep sound after a new bought device starts up.
Possible Reasons:
— No HDD is installed in the device.
— The installed HDD has not been initialized.
— The installed HDD is not compatible with the device or is broken-down.
Step 1 Verify at least one HDD is installed in the device.
1) If not, please install the compatible HDD.
Please refer to the “Quick Operation Guide” for the HDD installation steps.
2) If you do not want to install a HDD, select “Menu>Configuration > Exceptions”, and
uncheck the Audible Warning checkbox of “HDD Error”.
Step 2 Verify the HDD is initialized.
1) Select “Menu>HDD>General”.
325
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
2) If the status of the HDD is “Uninitialized”, please check the checkbox of corresponding
HDD and click the “Init” button.
Step 3 Verify the HDD is detected or is in good condition.
1) Select “Menu>HDD>General”.
2) If the HDD is not detected or the status is “Abnormal”, please replace the dedicated HDD
according to the requirement.
Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the step 1 to step 3.
1) If it is solved, finish the process.
2) If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.
 Live view stuck when video outputs locally.
Possible Reasons:
— The frame rate has not reached the real-time frame rate.
Step 1 Check the parameters of Main Stream (Continuous) and Main Stream (Event).
Select “Menu > Record > Parameters > Record”, and set the resolution of Main Stream
(Event) the same as the one of Main Stream (Continuous).
Step 2 Verify the frame rate is real-time frame rate.
Select “Menu > Record > Parameters > Record”, and set the Frame Rate to Full Frame.
Step 3 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
If it is solved, finish the process.
If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.
 When using the device to get the live view audio, there is no sound or there is too much noise,
or the volume is too low.
Possible Reasons:
— Cable between the pickup and camera is not connected well; impedance mismatches or
incompatible.
— The stream type is not set as “Video & Audio”.
Step 1 Verify the cable between the pickup and camera is connected well; impedance matches and
compatible.
Step 2 Verify the setting parameters are correct.
Select “Menu > Record > Parameters > Record”, and set the Stream Type as “Audio &
Video”.
Step 3 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
If it is solved, finish the process.
If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.
 The image gets stuck when DVR is playing back by single or multi-channel cameras.
326
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
Possible Reasons:
— The frame rate is not the real-time frame rate.
— The DVR supports up to 16-channel synchronize playback at the resolution of 4CIF, if you
want a 16-channel synchronize playback at the resolution of 720p, the frame extracting may
occur, which leads to a slight stuck.
Step 1 Verify the frame rate is real-time frame rate.
Select “Menu > Record > Parameters > Record”, and set the Frame Rate to “Full Frame”.
Step 2 Verify the hardware can afford the playback.
Reduce the channel number of playback.
Select “Menu > Record > Encoding > Record”, and set the resolution and bitrate to a lower
level.
Step 3 Reduce the number of local playback channel.
Select “Menu > Playback”, and uncheck the checkbox of unnecessary channels.
Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
If it is solved, finish the process.
If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.
 No record file found in the device local HDD, and the prompt “No record file found” pops up
when you search the record files.
Possible Reasons:
— The time setting of system is incorrect.
— The search condition is incorrect.
— The HDD is error or not detected.
Step 1 Verify the system time setting is correct.
Select “Menu > Configuration > General > General”, and verify the “System Time” is correct.
Step 2 Verify the search condition is correct.
Select “Playback”, and verify the channel and time are correct.
Step 3 Verify the HDD status is normal.
Select “Menu > HDD > General” to view the HDD status, and verify the HDD is detected and
can be read and written normally.
Step 4 Check if the fault is solved by the above steps.
If it is solved, finish the process.
If not, please contact the engineer from our company to do the further process.
327
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.4 Summary of Changes
18.4.1 Version 3.4.90
Added:

Add the new models: DS-7200HUHI-F1/S and DS-7200HUHI-F2/S. (Chapter 1.1 Front Panel,
Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel, Chapter 18.1 Specifications)
New functions for DS-7200HUHI-F/S series DVR:

The analog signal inputs including Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI and CVBS can be automatically
recognized without configuration. (Chapter 2.8 Configuring the Signal Input Channel)

5 MP long distance transmission can be enabled for the analog cameras. (Chapter 2.8
Configuring the Signal Input Channel)

The enhanced VCA mode conflicts with the 2K/4K output and 4 MP/5 MP signal input.
(Chapter 17.4 Configuring More Settings)

VCA information overlay in live view for the supported analog cameras and in smart playback
for the supported analog and IP cameras. (Chapter 3.2.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View
Mode, Chapter 6.1.5 Playing Back by Smart Search)

The defogging function can be enabled for the supported analog cameras. (Chapter 15.3.2
Configuring Camera Parameters Settings)

4 MP/5 MP signal switch for the supported analog cameras. (Chapter 15.3.2 Configuring
Camera Parameters Settings)

PTZ protocol of UTC (Coaxitron) configurable for the Coaxitron camera/dome connected.
(Chapter 4.1 Configuring PTZ Settings)

Multiple connected analog cameras supporting Turbo HD or AHD signal can be upgraded
simultaneously via DVR. (Chapter 16.6 Upgrading Camera)

PTZ linking for the VCA alarm. (Chapter 10 VCA Alarm)

One-key disarms the linkage actions of the alarm input. (Chapter 5.4 Configuring Alarm
Triggered Recording and Capture)
Deleted:

For the DDNS configuration, HiDDNS and IP Server are not supported.
18.4.2 Version 3.4.80
Added:
New functions for -F series DVR:
328
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Four kinds of analog signal inputs including Turbo HD (including 3 MP, 1080p and 720p signal),
AHD, HDCVI and CVBS can be connected. The analog signal inputs can be recognized
automatically and can be mixed randomly. (Chapter 2.4.1 Configuring the Signal Input Wizard,
Chapter 2.7 Configuring the Signal Input Channel)

For DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, 1-ch analog camera supports people counting
and heat map functions. (Chapter 11.4 People Counting, Chapter 11.5 Heat Map)

DS-7200/7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR support VCA (line crossing detection and
intrusion detection) of all channels. DS-7600HUHI-F/N series DVR support 2-ch VCA (line
crossing detection and intrusion detection). HQHI series DVR excluding 7100 series support
2-ch VCA (line crossing detection and intrusion detection). (Chapter 10 VCA Alarm)

For the analog channels, the line crossing detection and intrusion detection conflict with other
VCA detection such as sudden scene change detection, face detection and vehicle detection
and heat map or people counting functions. You can only enable one function. (Chapter 10
VCA Alarm)

For DS-7208/7216HUHI-F/N series DVR, you can enable enhanced VCA mode to enable
all-channel line crossing detection and intrusion detection and disable 2K/4K output
resolution. After you enable it, you can also disable it and the line crossing detection and
intrusion detection will be supported by 2-ch only. (Chapter 17.4 Configuring More Settings)

The CVBS output only serves as the aux output or live view output. For
DS-7608/7616HUHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N series DVR, the HDMI and VGA
interfaces can be configured to be simultaneous or independent. (Chapter 3.2 Operations in
Live View Mode, Chapter 3.4 Adjusting Live View Settings, Chapter 17.1 Configuring General
Settings)

For HGHI-F series DVR, 1080p lite mode is applicable to all the channels. (Chapter 5.12
Configuring 1080P Lite)

For DS-7300/8100HQHI-F/N and DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR, NELUES protocol is
supported. (Chapter 9 POS Configuration)

PTZ control via Omnicast VMS of Genetec is supported. (Chapter 4 PTZ Control)

GUID file can be exported for password resetting. If you forget the login password, you can
import GUID file from the USB flash disk to reset the password. (Chapter 2.5.1 User Login,
Chapter 17.5.3 Editing a User)

Remaining recording time of the HDD can be viewed. The algorithm is to use average bit rate
for the channel enabling smart encoding. (Chapter 14 HDD Management)

Connectable to IP camera of 4K resolution. (Chapter 2.6.2 Adding the Online IP Camera)
18.4.3 Version 3.4.75
Added:
329
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
New functions for DS-7100/7200HGHI-F/N, DS-7100/7200HGHI-F, HQHI, and 7200HUHI-F/N series
DVR:

Connectable to HDCVI signal input. (Chapter 2.4.1 Configuring the Signal Input Wizard,
Chapter 2.7 Configuring the Signal Input Channel, Chapter 18.1 Specifications)

There is no signal input configuration interface. Four kinds of analog signal inputs including
Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI and CVBS can be connected. The analog signal inputs can be recognized
automatically and can be mixed randomly. (Chapter 2.4.1 Configuring the Signal Input Wizard,
Chapter 2.7 Configuring the Signal Input Channel)

The main stream of HQHI series support up to 3 MP resolution for the first channel of DVR
with 4-ch video inputs, the first 2 channels of DVR with 8-ch video inputs and the first 4
channels of DVR with 16-ch video inputs. (Chapter 2.4.1 Configuring the Signal Input Wizard,
Chapter 2.7 Configuring the Signal Input Channel, Chapter 5.1 Configuring Encoding
Parameters)

For HQHI and DS-7200HUHI-F/N series DVR, if the 3 MP camera is connected to the channel
which supports up to 1080p signal input, it will switch to 1080p signal input. When the 3 MP
signal is switched to 1080p signal, the PAL will be switched to 1080p/25Hz, and the NTSC will
be switched to 1080p/30Hz. (Chapter 5.1 Configuring Encoding Parameters)

When Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, the information including the resolutuion
and frame rate will be overlaid on the bottom right corner of the live view for 5 seconds.
When CVBS input is connected, the information such as NTSC or PAL will be overlaid on the
bottom right corner of the live view for 5 seconds. (Chapter 2.4.1 Configuring the Signal Input
Wizard, Chapter 2.7 Configuring the Signal Input Channel)

When Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, you can view the information including
the input signal type, resolution and frame rate (e.g., Turbo HD 720P25) on the Record
Parameters interface. When CVBS input is connected, you can view the information such as
NTSC or PAL on the Record Parameters interface. (Chapter 5.1 Configuring Encoding
Parameters)

If DHCP is enabled, you can enable DNS DHCP or disable it and edit the Preferred DNS Server
and Alternate DNS Server. (Chapter 2.4.1 Configuring the Signal Input Wizard, Chapter 12.1
Configuring General Settings)
18.4.4 Version 3.4.70
Added:
New functions for DS-7100/7200HGHI-F and DS-7100/7200HQHI-F/N series DVR:

There is no signal input configuration interface. Four kinds of analog signal inputs including
Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI and CVBS can be connected. The analog signal inputs can be recognized
automatically and each two of the analog signal inputs can be mixed randomly. (Chapter 2.4.1
Configuring the Signal Input Wizard, Chapter 2.7 Configuring the Signal Input Channel)
330
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

When Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, the information including the resolutuion
and frame rate (e.g., 720P25) will be overlaid on the bottom right corner of the live view for 5
seconds. When CVBS input is connected, the information such as NTSC or PAL will be overlaid
on the bottom right corner of the live view for 5 seconds. When there is no video signal of the
analog channel, the connectable video signal type message will not be displayed on the screen.
(Chapter 2.4.1 Configuring the Signal Input Wizard, Chapter 2.7 Configuring the Signal Input
Channel)

When Turbo HD, AHD, or HDCVI input is connected, you can view the information including
the input signal type, resolution and frame rate (e.g., Turbo HD 720P25) on the Record
Parameters interface. When CVBS input is connected, you can view the information such as
NTSC or PAL on the Record Parameters interface. (Chapter 5.1 Configuring Encoding
Parameters)

One-key enable or disable H.264+. (Chapter 5.11 One-Key Enabling and Disabling H.264+ for
Analog Cameras)

Configurable of black-to-color threshold, color-to-black threshold and IR light brightness for
the connected analog cameras supporting these parameters. (Chapter 15.3.2 Configuring
Camera Parameters Settings)

Output bandwidth limit configurable. (Chapter 12.2.6 Configuring More Settings)

Unlock pattern for device login for the admin. (Chapter 2.3 Using the Unlock Pattern for Login,
Chapter 17.5.3 Editing a User)

Clear-text password available. (Chapter 2.2 Activating the Device, Chapter 2.3.2 Logging in via
Unlock Pattern, Chapter 2.4.2 Using the Wizard for Basic Configuration, Chapter 2.5.3 User
Login, Chapter 2.6 Adding and Connecting the IP Cameras, Chapter 12.2 Configuring Advanced
Settings, Chapter 17.5 Managing User Accounts)

Accessible by Hik Cloud P2P. (Chapter 2.4.2 Using the Wizard for Basic Configuration, Chapter
12.2.2 Configuring Hik Cloud P2P)
18.4.5 Version 3.4.65
Added:

Add the new model: DS-9000HUHI-F16/N. (Chapter 1.1 Front Panel, Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel,
Chapter 18.1 Specifications)

Add picture capture, playback and backup of captured pictures. (Chapter 5 Recording and
Capture Settings, Chapter 6.1.9 Playing Back Pictures, Chapter 7.1.1 Backing up by Normal
Video Search/Picture Search)

Hik Cloud P2P is supported. (Chapter 2.3.2 Using the Wizard for Basic Configuration, Chapter
12.2.2 Configuring Hik Cloud P2P)

DS-7300/8100/9000HUHI-F/N series DVR support VCA (line crossing detection and intrusion
detection) of all channels and 2-ch sudden scene change detection. Except 16-ch, other
331
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
channels support audio exception detection. (Chapter 5.5 Configuring Event Recording and
Capture, Chapter 10 VCA Alarm)
18.4.6 Version 3.4.60
Added:

Add the new models: DS-7300HUHI-F4/N, DS-8100HUHI-F8/N and DS-9000HUHI-F8/N.
(Chapter 1.1 Front Panel, Chapter 1.5 Rear Panel, Chapter 18.1 Specifications)

For the new models, there are two HDMI interfaces and the video outputs provide
VGA/HDMI1, HDMI2 and Main CVBS outputs. HDMI1 and VGA interfaces share simultaneous
output and HDMI2 interface is independent. For HDMI1/VGA output, up to 1080p resolution
is supported. For HDMI2 output, up to 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz resolution is supported.
(Chapter 3.4 Adjusting Live View Settings, Chapter 17.1 Configuring General Settings, Chapter
17.4 Configuring More Settings, )

For the new models, if the sum of the analog and IP channels exceeds 25, up to 32-window
division mode is supported for the VGA/HDMI1 output. (Chapter 3.4 Adjusting Live View
Settings)

For the new models, IP cameras up to 8MP resolution can be connected. The max.
connectable IP cameras vary with different models. Disabling one analog channel will add one
IP channel. (Chapter 2.3.2 Using the Wizard for Basic Configuration, Chapter 2.6 Configuring
the Signal Input Channel)

The new models can connect the IP camera supporting H.265. You can also enable H.265+ for
the connected IP camera supporting H.265. And the encoding type information of the IP
camera will change on the left-click menu. (Chapter 2.3.2 Using the Wizard for Basic
Configuration, Chapter 2.5.2 Adding the Online IP Camera, Chapter 3.2.3 Quick Setting Toolbar
in Live View Mode, Chapter 5.1 Configuring Encoding Parameters)

For the new models, RAID and disk clone is supported. Hot-swappable HDD is supported.
(Chapter 13 RAID, Chapter 14.6 Configuring Disk Clone)

For the new models, there are 2 self-adaptive 10M/100M/1000M network interfaces and only
multi-address and network fault tolerance working modes are configurable. (Chapter 2.3.2
Using the Wizard for Basic Configuration, Chapter 12.1 Configuring General Settings)
18.4.7 Version 3.4.51
Added:

Add the new models: DS-7604HUHI-F1/N, DS-7608HUHI-F2/N and DS-7616HUHI-F2/N. (Chapter
17.1 Specifications)
18.4.8 Version 3.4.50
Added:
332
Digital Video Recorder User Manual

Add the new model: DS-7216HUHI-F2/N. (Chapter 17.1 Specifications)

For DS-7200HUHI-F/N series, the default Turbo HD/CVBS signal input type also supports the
auto detection of 3MP signal. (Chapter 5.1 Configuring Encoding Parameters)

Support the switching of signal input types including Turbo HD/CVBS, AHD and IP signal for
DS-7200HUHI-F/N series DVR. (Chapter 2.1 Configuring the Signal Input Channel, Chapter 2.6
Configuring the Signal Input Channel)

The IP channels will not be displayed on the signal input interface and you can view the max.
IP camera accessible numbers in the Max. IP Cameras Access text field. (Chapter 2.1
Configuring the Signal Input Channel, Chapter 2.6 Configuring the Signal Input Channel)

Up to 3MP encoding resolution of all channels is supported for DS-7200HUHI-F/N series DVR.
(Chapter 5.1 Configuring Encoding Parameters)

The encoding type information of the IP camera changes to H.264 on the left-click menu.
(Chapter 3.2.3 Quick Setting Toolbar in Live View Mode)
18.4.9 Version 3.4.4
Added:

Add the new model: DS-7116HQHI-F1/N. (Chapter 17.1 Specifications)

Add 3MP signal input types supported by HUHI series DVR. Each two of the signals can be
mixed randomly. (Chapter 2.6 Configuring the Signal Input Channel)
Updated:

Support the switching of signal input types including Turbo HD/CVBS, AHD and IP signal.
(Chapter 2.1 Configuring the Signal Input Channel, Chapter 2.6 Configuring the Signal Input
Channel)
Deleted:

Delete the Enhanced Turbo HD 720p Compatibility option for the signal input. (Chapter 2.6
Configuring the Signal Input Channel)
18.4.10 Version 3.4.3
Added:

Add the new models: DS-7100HGHI-F/N, DS-7200HGHI-F/N, DS-7200HUHI-F/N,
DS-7300HQHI-F/N, and DS-8100HQHI-F/N. (Chapter1.1 Front Panel, Chapter1.5 Rear Panel,
Chapter 17.1 Specifications)

Add the POS function supported by DS-7300HQHI-F/N and DS-8100HQHI-F/N. (Chapter 5
Recording Settings, Chapter 6 Playback, Chapter 9 POS Configuration)

Add Cloud storage. (Chapter 13.5 Configuring Cloud Storage)
333
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.4.11 Version 3.4.2
Added:

The DS-7100/7200HQHI-F1/N and DS-7200HQHI-F2/N series support up to 1080p lite
(960×1080) resolution.

Support 2K (2560 × 1440)/60Hz and 4K (3840 × 2160)/30Hz VGA/HDMI resolution for
DS-7216HQHI-F1/N and DS-7216HQHI-F2/N.

Emails with attached pictures are supported for VCA alarm. For the IP camera, the attached
picture of the local channel can be sent. The attached pictures of the linked cameras cannot be
sent.

The hardware version is available in the system information.
Updated:

Support the switching of signal input types including Turbo HD, AHD/CVBS and IP signal.
334
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
18.5 List of Compatible Hikvision IP Cameras
Type
Max.
Sub-stream
Audio
1600×1200
√
×
V5.1.0 build
131202
2048×1536
√
√
DS-2CD783F-EI
V5.1.0 build
131202
2560×1920
√
√
DS-2CD7164-E
V5.1.0 build
131202
1280×720
√
×
DS-2CD864FW
D-E
V5.1.0 build
131202
1600×1200
√
√
DS-2CD4026F
WD 14.33
V5.1.0 build5
131202
1920×1080
√
√
DS-2CD6233F
14.24
V5.1.0 build5
131202
2048×1536
√
×
DS-2CD2012-I
V5.1.0build1
31202
1280×960
√
×
DS-2CD4012F
V5.1.0 build
131202
1280×1024
√
√
DS-2CD4232F
WD-I
V5.1.0 build
131202
2048×1536
√
√
SD Network DS-2CD793PF
Camera
WD-EI
V5.1.0 build
131202
704×576
√
√
Intelligence
Traffic
Camera
iDS-2CD9122
V3.5.0
build131012
1920×1080
×
×
iDS-2CD9121
V3.4.2 build
130718
1600×1200
×
×
Network
Speed
Dome
DS-2DF7274
V5.1.0 build
130923
1280×960
√
√
DS-2DE7174
V5.0.2Build1
30926
1280×960
√
√
HD
Network
Camera
Model
Version
DS-2CD7153-E
V5.1.0 build
131202
DS-2CD754F-EI
Resolution
335
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
For the list, our company holds right to interpret.
18.6 List of Compatible Third-Party IP Cameras
Max.
Sub-
Resolution
stream
5.2
1440×900
√
×
SNC-RH
124
1.7.00
1280×720
√
√
Samsung
SND-50
80P
3.10_130
1280×1024
416
√
√
Vivotek
FD8134
0107a
1280×800
√
×
Bosch
Dinion
V105004
NBN-92
53
1-P
1280×720
×
×
1280×960
×
√
1280×960
×
√
Manufacturer
Model
Version
Axis
P3304
Sony
Audio
Panasonic
SP306H
Applicati
on: 1.34
Image
Data:
1.06
Cannon
VB-H41
0
Ver.+1.0.
0
Zavio
F3206
MG.1.6.0
1920×1080
2c045
√
×
Pelco
IX30DN
-ACFZH
B3
1.8.2-20
1203272.9080-A
1.7852
√
×
2048×1536
03040901070112
336
Digital Video Recorder User Manual
337
Download PDF
Similar pages